Merge branch 'linus' into x86/doc

153 files changed, 4205 insertions, 1570 deletions

diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index 661b6ccfe180..73060819ed99 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -89,8 +89,6 @@ cciss.txt
         - info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers.
 cdrom/
         - directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has.
-cli-sti-removal.txt
-        - cli()/sti() removal guide.
 computone.txt
         - info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver.
 connector/
@@ -359,8 +357,6 @@ telephony/
         - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support.
 time_interpolators.txt
         - info on time interpolators.
-tipar.txt
-        - information about Parallel link cable for Texas Instruments handhelds.
 tty.txt
         - guide to the locking policies of the tty layer.
 uml/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..79a4a75b2d2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../state
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                state. This holds the regulator output state.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'unknown'
+
+                'enabled' means the regulator output is ON and is supplying
+                power to the system.
+
+                'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not
+                supplying power to the system..
+
+                'unknown' means software cannot determine the state.
+
+                NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts
+                and microamps to determine regulator output levels.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../type
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                type. This holds the regulator type.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'voltage'
+                'current'
+                'unknown'
+
+                'voltage' means the regulator output voltage can be controlled
+                by software.
+
+                'current' means the regulator output current limit can be
+                controlled by software.
+
+                'unknown' means software cannot control either voltage or
+                current limit.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting
+                measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts).
+
+                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
+                output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of
+                whether the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit
+                setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps).
+
+                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
+                output current level as this value is the same regardless of
+                whether the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting.
+
+                The opmode value can be one of the following strings:
+
+                'fast'
+                'normal'
+                'idle'
+                'standby'
+                'unknown'
+
+                The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h
+
+                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
+                output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of
+                whether the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
+                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
+                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
+                output current limit setting for this domain measured in
+                microamps.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
+                output current limit setting for this domain measured in
+                microamps.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that
+                have called regulator_enable() on this regulator.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load
+                current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer
+                devices.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../parent
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent.
+                This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
+                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
+                the system is suspended to memory.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
+                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
+                the system is suspended to disk.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
+                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
+                the system is suspended to standby.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
+                memory.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
+                standby.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state
+                when suspended to memory.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'not defined'
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state
+                when suspended to disk.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'not defined'
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating
+                state when suspended to standby.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'not defined'
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a9f2b8b0530f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+What:           /sys/dev
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Dan Williams <dan.j.williams@intel.com>
+Description:    The /sys/dev tree provides a method to look up the sysfs
+                path for a device using the information returned from
+                stat(2).  There are two directories, 'block' and 'char',
+                beneath /sys/dev containing symbolic links with names of
+                the form "<major>:<minor>".  These links point to the
+                corresponding sysfs path for the given device.
+
+                Example:
+                $ readlink /sys/dev/block/8:32
+                ../../block/sdc
+
+                Entries in /sys/dev/char and /sys/dev/block will be
+                dynamically created and destroyed as devices enter and
+                leave the system.
+
+Users:          mdadm <linux-raid@vger.kernel.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a16fe1e2270
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+What:           /sys/devices/system/memory
+Date:           June 2008
+Contact:        Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+                The /sys/devices/system/memory contains a snapshot of the
+                internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be
+                added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove
+                operations.
+
+Users:          hotplug memory add/remove tools
+                https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
+
+What:           /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable
+Date:           June 2008
+Contact:        Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+                The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable
+                indicates whether this memory block is removable or not.
+                This is useful for a user-level agent to determine
+                identify removable sections of the memory before attempting
+                potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation
+
+Users:          hotplug memory remove tools
+                https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..190d523ac159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+What:           /sys/kernel/mm
+Date:           July 2008
+Contact:        Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, VM maintainers
+Description:
+                /sys/kernel/mm/ should contain any and all VM
+                related information in /sys/kernel/.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e21c00571cf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+What:           /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/
+Date:           June 2008
+Contact:        Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, hugetlb maintainers
+Description:
+                /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/ contains a number of subdirectories
+                of the form hugepages-<size>kB, where <size> is the page size
+                of the hugepages supported by the kernel/CPU combination.
+
+                Under these directories are a number of files:
+                        nr_hugepages
+                        nr_overcommit_hugepages
+                        free_hugepages
+                        surplus_hugepages
+                        resv_hugepages
+                See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle
index 6caa14615578..1875e502f872 100644
--- a/Documentation/CodingStyle
+++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle
@@ -474,25 +474,29 @@ make a good program).
 So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner
 values.  To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
 
-(defun linux-c-mode ()
-  "C mode with adjusted defaults for use with the Linux kernel."
-  (interactive)
-  (c-mode)
-  (c-set-style "K&R")
-  (setq tab-width 8)
-  (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-  (setq c-basic-offset 8))
-
-This will define the M-x linux-c-mode command.  When hacking on a
-module, if you put the string -*- linux-c -*- somewhere on the first
-two lines, this mode will be automatically invoked. Also, you may want
-to add
-
-(setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("/usr/src/linux.*/.*\\.[ch]$" . linux-c-mode)
-                        auto-mode-alist))
-
-to your .emacs file if you want to have linux-c-mode switched on
-automagically when you edit source files under /usr/src/linux.
+(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
+  "Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
+  (let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
+         (column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
+         (offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
+         (steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
+    (* (max steps 1)
+       c-basic-offset)))
+
+(add-hook 'c-mode-hook
+          (lambda ()
+            (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
+              ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
+              (when (and filename
+                         (string-match "~/src/linux-trees" filename))
+                (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
+                (c-set-style "linux")
+                (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
+                              '(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
+                                c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
+
+This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
+files below ~/src/linux-trees.
 
 But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not
 everything is lost: use "indent".
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 80d150458c80..d8b63d164e41 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -298,10 +298,10 @@ recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the
 cache width is.
 
 int
-dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr)
+dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
 
 int
-pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr)
+pci_dma_mapping_error(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
 
 In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create
 a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
index 6d772f84b477..b768cc0e402b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
@@ -22,3 +22,12 @@ ready and available in memory.  The DMA of the "completion indication"
 could race with data DMA.  Mapping the memory used for completion
 indications with DMA_ATTR_WRITE_BARRIER would prevent the race.
 
+DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING
+----------------------
+
+DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING specifies that reads and writes to the mapping
+may be weakly ordered, that is that reads and writes may pass each other.
+
+Since it is optional for platforms to implement DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING,
+those that do not will simply ignore the attribute and exhibit default
+behavior.
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
index 0eb0d027eb32..1615350b7b53 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
             kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
             gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
             genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
-            mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml
+            mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml
 
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):
@@ -102,6 +102,13 @@ C-procfs-example = procfs_example.xml
 C-procfs-example2 = $(addprefix $(obj)/,$(C-procfs-example))
 $(obj)/procfs-guide.xml: $(C-procfs-example2)
 
+# List of programs to build
+##oops, this is a kernel module::hostprogs-y := procfs_example
+obj-m += procfs_example.o
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
 notfoundtemplate = echo "*** You have to install docbook-utils or xmlto ***"; \
                    exit 1
 db2xtemplate = db2TYPE -o $(dir $@) $<
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
index 2510763295d0..084f6ad7b7a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
@@ -219,10 +219,10 @@
    </para>
 
    <sect1 id="lock-intro">
-   <title>Three Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks, Mutexes and Semaphores</title>
+   <title>Two Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks and Mutexes</title>
 
    <para>
-     There are three main types of kernel locks.  The fundamental type
+     There are two main types of kernel locks.  The fundamental type
      is the spinlock 
      (<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/spinlock.h</filename>),
      which is a very simple single-holder lock: if you can't get the 
@@ -240,14 +240,6 @@
      use a spinlock instead.
    </para>
    <para>
-     The third type is a semaphore
-     (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/semaphore.h</filename>): it
-     can have more than one holder at any time (the number decided at
-     initialization time), although it is most commonly used as a
-     single-holder lock (a mutex).  If you can't get a semaphore, your
-     task will be suspended and later on woken up - just like for mutexes.
-   </para>
-   <para>
      Neither type of lock is recursive: see
      <xref linkend="deadlock"/>.
    </para>
@@ -278,7 +270,7 @@
     </para>
 
     <para>
-      Semaphores still exist, because they are required for
+      Mutexes still exist, because they are required for
       synchronization between <firstterm linkend="gloss-usercontext">user 
       contexts</firstterm>, as we will see below.
     </para>
@@ -289,18 +281,17 @@
 
      <para>
        If you have a data structure which is only ever accessed from
-       user context, then you can use a simple semaphore
-       (<filename>linux/linux/semaphore.h</filename>) to protect it.  This
-       is the most trivial case: you initialize the semaphore to the number 
-       of resources available (usually 1), and call
-       <function>down_interruptible()</function> to grab the semaphore, and 
-       <function>up()</function> to release it.  There is also a 
-       <function>down()</function>, which should be avoided, because it 
+       user context, then you can use a simple mutex
+       (<filename>include/linux/mutex.h</filename>) to protect it.  This
+       is the most trivial case: you initialize the mutex.  Then you can
+       call <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> to grab the mutex,
+       and <function>mutex_unlock()</function> to release it.  There is also a 
+       <function>mutex_lock()</function>, which should be avoided, because it 
        will not return if a signal is received.
      </para>
 
      <para>
-       Example: <filename>linux/net/core/netfilter.c</filename> allows 
+       Example: <filename>net/netfilter/nf_sockopt.c</filename> allows 
        registration of new <function>setsockopt()</function> and 
        <function>getsockopt()</function> calls, with
        <function>nf_register_sockopt()</function>.  Registration and 
@@ -515,7 +506,7 @@
       <listitem>
         <para>
           If you are in a process context (any syscall) and want to
-        lock other process out, use a semaphore.  You can take a semaphore
+        lock other process out, use a mutex.  You can take a mutex
         and sleep (<function>copy_from_user*(</function> or
         <function>kmalloc(x,GFP_KERNEL)</function>).
       </para>
@@ -662,7 +653,7 @@
 <entry>SLBH</entry>
 <entry>SLBH</entry>
 <entry>SLBH</entry>
-<entry>DI</entry>
+<entry>MLI</entry>
 <entry>None</entry>
 </row>
 
@@ -692,8 +683,8 @@
 <entry>spin_lock_bh</entry>
 </row>
 <row>
-<entry>DI</entry>
-<entry>down_interruptible</entry>
+<entry>MLI</entry>
+<entry>mutex_lock_interruptible</entry>
 </row>
 
 </tbody>
@@ -1310,7 +1301,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>.
     <para>
       There is a coding bug where a piece of code tries to grab a
       spinlock twice: it will spin forever, waiting for the lock to
-      be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and semaphores are not
+      be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and mutexes are not
       recursive in Linux).  This is trivial to diagnose: not a
       stay-up-five-nights-talk-to-fluffy-code-bunnies kind of
       problem.
@@ -1335,7 +1326,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>.
 
     <para>
       This complete lockup is easy to diagnose: on SMP boxes the
-      watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCKS</symbol> set
+      watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCK</symbol> set
       (<filename>include/linux/spinlock.h</filename>) will show this up 
       immediately when it happens.
     </para>
@@ -1558,7 +1549,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
    <title>Read/Write Lock Variants</title>
 
    <para>
-      Both spinlocks and semaphores have read/write variants:
+      Both spinlocks and mutexes have read/write variants:
       <type>rwlock_t</type> and <structname>struct rw_semaphore</structname>.
       These divide users into two classes: the readers and the writers.  If
       you are only reading the data, you can get a read lock, but to write to
@@ -1681,7 +1672,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
  #include &lt;linux/slab.h&gt;
  #include &lt;linux/string.h&gt;
 +#include &lt;linux/rcupdate.h&gt;
- #include &lt;linux/semaphore.h&gt;
+ #include &lt;linux/mutex.h&gt;
  #include &lt;asm/errno.h&gt;
 
  struct object
@@ -1913,7 +1904,7 @@ machines due to caching.
        </listitem>
        <listitem>
         <para>
-          <function> put_user()</function>
+          <function>put_user()</function>
         </para>
        </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
@@ -1927,13 +1918,13 @@ machines due to caching.
 
      <listitem>
       <para>
-      <function>down_interruptible()</function> and
-      <function>down()</function>
+      <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> and
+      <function>mutex_lock()</function>
       </para>
       <para>
-       There is a <function>down_trylock()</function> which can be
+       There is a <function>mutex_trylock()</function> which can be
        used inside interrupt context, as it will not sleep.
-       <function>up()</function> will also never sleep.
+       <function>mutex_unlock()</function> will also never sleep.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
@@ -2023,7 +2014,7 @@ machines due to caching.
       <para>
         Prior to 2.5, or when <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> is
         unset, processes in user context inside the kernel would not
-        preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you have it up,
+        preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you gave it up,
         except for interrupts).  With the addition of
         <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> in 2.5.4, this changed: when
         in user context, higher priority tasks can "cut in": spinlocks
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
index e8acd1f03456..372dec20c8da 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
@@ -98,6 +98,24 @@
     "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb".
     </para>
     <para>
+    It is advised, but not required that you turn on the
+    CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER kernel option.  This option inserts code to
+    into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in
+    registers or on the stack at different points which will allow a
+    debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces
+    while debugging the kernel.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA, you should consider turning it off.  This
+    option will prevent the use of software breakpoints because it
+    marks certain regions of the kernel's memory space as read-only.
+    If kgdb supports it for the architecture you are using, you can
+    use hardware breakpoints if you desire to run with the
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA option turned on, else you need to turn off
+    this option.
+    </para>
+    <para>
     Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging
     host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires a KGDB
     I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
index 1fd6a1ec7591..8a5dc6e021ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
@@ -29,12 +29,12 @@
 
     <revhistory>
       <revision>
-        <revnumber>1.0&nbsp;</revnumber>
+        <revnumber>1.0</revnumber>
         <date>May 30, 2001</date>
         <revremark>Initial revision posted to linux-kernel</revremark>
       </revision>
       <revision>
-        <revnumber>1.1&nbsp;</revnumber>
+        <revnumber>1.1</revnumber>
         <date>June 3, 2001</date>
         <revremark>Revised after comments from linux-kernel</revremark>
       </revision>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
index 7064084c1c5e..2f3de0fb8365 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
@@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ static int __init init_procfs_example(void)
         return 0;
 
 no_symlink:
-        remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir);
-no_tty:
         remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir);
 no_bar:
         remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir);
@@ -206,7 +204,6 @@ out:
 static void __exit cleanup_procfs_example(void)
 {
         remove_proc_entry("jiffies_too", example_dir);
-        remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir);
         remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir);
         remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir);
         remove_proc_entry("jiffies", example_dir);
@@ -222,3 +219,4 @@ module_exit(cleanup_procfs_example);
 
 MODULE_AUTHOR("Erik Mouw");
 MODULE_DESCRIPTION("procfs examples");
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
index 4acc73240a6d..95bfc12e5439 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
       the hardware structures represented here, please consult the Principles
       of Operation.
     </para>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/cio.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cio.h
     </sect1>
     <sect1 id="ccwdev">
      <title>ccw devices</title>
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
       ccw device structure. Device drivers must not bypass those functions
       or strange side effects may happen.
     </para>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwdev.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwdev.h
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/device.c
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/device_ops.c
     </sect1>
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
         measurement data which is made available by the channel subsystem
         for each channel attached device.
   </para>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/cmb.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cmb.h
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/cmf.c
     </sect1>
   </chapter>
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
   </para>
    <sect1 id="ccwgroupdevices">
     <title>ccw group devices</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwgroup.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwgroup.h
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/ccwgroup.c
    </sect1>
   </chapter>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c3dc4c69dd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+        "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="sh-drivers">
+ <bookinfo>
+  <title>SuperH Interfaces Guide</title>
+  
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Paul</firstname>
+    <surname>Mundt</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>lethal@linux-sh.org</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2008</year>
+   <holder>Paul Mundt</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2008</year>
+   <holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder>
+  </copyright>
+
+  <legalnotice>
+   <para>
+     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
+     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+     License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
+   </para>
+      
+   <para>
+     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
+     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+   </para>
+      
+   <para>
+     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
+     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
+     MA 02111-1307 USA
+   </para>
+      
+   <para>
+     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
+     distribution of Linux.
+   </para>
+  </legalnotice>
+ </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+
+  <chapter id="mm">
+    <title>Memory Management</title>
+    <sect1 id="sh4">
+    <title>SH-4</title>
+      <sect2 id="sq">
+        <title>Store Queue API</title>
+!Earch/sh/kernel/cpu/sh4/sq.c
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1 id="sh5">
+      <title>SH-5</title>
+      <sect2 id="tlb">
+        <title>TLB Interfaces</title>
+!Iarch/sh/mm/tlb-sh5.c
+!Iarch/sh/include/asm/tlb_64.h
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="clk">
+    <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title>
+!Iarch/sh/include/asm/clock.h
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="mach">
+    <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title>
+    <sect1 id="dreamcast">
+      <title>mach-dreamcast</title>
+!Iarch/sh/boards/mach-dreamcast/rtc.c
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1 id="x3proto">
+      <title>mach-x3proto</title>
+!Earch/sh/boards/mach-x3proto/ilsel.c
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="busses">
+    <title>Busses</title>
+    <sect1 id="superhyway">
+      <title>SuperHyway</title>
+!Edrivers/sh/superhyway/superhyway.c
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 id="maple">
+      <title>Maple</title>
+!Edrivers/sh/maple/maple.c
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+</book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
index fdd7f4f887b7..df87d1b93605 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
@@ -21,6 +21,18 @@
     </affiliation>
 </author>
 
+<copyright>
+        <year>2006-2008</year>
+        <holder>Hans-Jürgen Koch.</holder>
+</copyright>
+
+<legalnotice>
+<para>
+This documentation is Free Software licensed under the terms of the
+GPL version 2.
+</para>
+</legalnotice>
+
 <pubdate>2006-12-11</pubdate>
 
 <abstract>
@@ -30,6 +42,12 @@
 
 <revhistory>
         <revision>
+        <revnumber>0.5</revnumber>
+        <date>2008-05-22</date>
+        <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
+        <revremark>Added description of write() function.</revremark>
+        </revision>
+        <revision>
         <revnumber>0.4</revnumber>
         <date>2007-11-26</date>
         <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
@@ -57,20 +75,9 @@
 </bookinfo>
 
 <chapter id="aboutthisdoc">
-<?dbhtml filename="about.html"?>
+<?dbhtml filename="aboutthis.html"?>
 <title>About this document</title>
 
-<sect1 id="copyright">
-<?dbhtml filename="copyright.html"?>
-<title>Copyright and License</title>
-<para>
-      Copyright (c) 2006 by Hans-Jürgen Koch.</para>
-<para>
-This documentation is Free Software licensed under the terms of the
-GPL version 2.
-</para>
-</sect1>
-
 <sect1 id="translations">
 <?dbhtml filename="translations.html"?>
 <title>Translations</title>
@@ -189,6 +196,30 @@ interested in translating it, please email me
         represents the total interrupt count. You can use this number
         to figure out if you missed some interrupts.
         </para>
+        <para>
+        For some hardware that has more than one interrupt source internally,
+        but not separate IRQ mask and status registers, there might be
+        situations where userspace cannot determine what the interrupt source
+        was if the kernel handler disables them by writing to the chip's IRQ
+        register. In such a case, the kernel has to disable the IRQ completely
+        to leave the chip's register untouched. Now the userspace part can
+        determine the cause of the interrupt, but it cannot re-enable
+        interrupts. Another cornercase is chips where re-enabling interrupts
+        is a read-modify-write operation to a combined IRQ status/acknowledge
+        register. This would be racy if a new interrupt occurred
+        simultaneously.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        To address these problems, UIO also implements a write() function. It
+        is normally not used and can be ignored for hardware that has only a
+        single interrupt source or has separate IRQ mask and status registers.
+        If you need it, however, a write to <filename>/dev/uioX</filename>
+        will call the <function>irqcontrol()</function> function implemented
+        by the driver. You have to write a 32-bit value that is usually either
+        0 or 1 to disable or enable interrupts. If a driver does not implement
+        <function>irqcontrol()</function>, <function>write()</function> will
+        return with <varname>-ENOSYS</varname>.
+        </para>
 
         <para>
         To handle interrupts properly, your custom kernel module can
@@ -362,6 +393,14 @@ device is actually used.
 <function>open()</function>, you will probably also want a custom
 <function>release()</function> function.
 </para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>
+<varname>int (*irqcontrol)(struct uio_info *info, s32 irq_on)
+</varname>: Optional. If you need to be able to enable or disable
+interrupts from userspace by writing to <filename>/dev/uioX</filename>,
+you can implement this function. The parameter <varname>irq_on</varname>
+will be 0 to disable interrupts and 1 to enable them.
+</para></listitem>
 </itemizedlist>
 
 <para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
index 89817795e668..0bc25949b668 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
@@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ static struct video_buffer capture_fb;
 
   <chapter id="pubfunctions">
      <title>Public Functions Provided</title>
-!Edrivers/media/video/videodev.c
+!Edrivers/media/video/v4l2-dev.c
   </chapter>
 
 </book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
index 42c75ba71ba2..a42a8a4c7689 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
@@ -69,12 +69,6 @@
         device to be used as both a tty interface and as a synchronous 
         controller is a project for Linux post the 2.4 release
   </para>
-  <para>
-        The support code handles most common card configurations and
-        supports running both Cisco HDLC and Synchronous PPP. With extra
-        glue the frame relay and X.25 protocols can also be used with this
-        driver.
-  </para>
   </chapter>
   
   <chapter id="Driver_Modes">
@@ -179,35 +173,27 @@
   <para>
         If you wish to use the network interface facilities of the driver,
         then you need to attach a network device to each channel that is
-        present and in use. In addition to use the SyncPPP and Cisco HDLC
+        present and in use. In addition to use the generic HDLC
         you need to follow some additional plumbing rules. They may seem 
         complex but a look at the example hostess_sv11 driver should
         reassure you.
   </para>
   <para>
         The network device used for each channel should be pointed to by
-        the netdevice field of each channel. The dev-&gt; priv field of the
+        the netdevice field of each channel. The hdlc-&gt; priv field of the
         network device points to your private data - you will need to be
-        able to find your ppp device from this. In addition to use the
-        sync ppp layer the private data must start with a void * pointer
-        to the syncppp structures.
+        able to find your private data from this.
   </para>
   <para>
         The way most drivers approach this particular problem is to
         create a structure holding the Z8530 device definition and
-        put that and the syncppp pointer into the private field of
-        the network device. The network device fields of the channels
-        then point back to the network devices. The ppp_device can also
-        be put in the private structure conveniently.
+        put that into the private field of the network device. The
+        network device fields of the channels then point back to the
+        network devices.
   </para>
   <para>
-        If you wish to use the synchronous ppp then you need to attach
-        the syncppp layer to the network device. You should do this before
-        you register the network device. The
-        <function>sppp_attach</function> requires that the first void *
-        pointer in your private data is pointing to an empty struct
-        ppp_device. The function fills in the initial data for the
-        ppp/hdlc layer.
+        If you wish to use the generic HDLC then you need to register
+        the HDLC device.
   </para>
   <para>
         Before you register your network device you will also need to
@@ -314,10 +300,10 @@
         buffer in sk_buff format and queues it for transmission. The
         caller must provide the entire packet with the exception of the
         bitstuffing and CRC. This is normally done by the caller via
-        the syncppp interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been 
-        queued and non zero values  for queue full. If the function accepts 
-        the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller 
-        should not free it. 
+        the generic HDLC interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been
+        queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts
+        the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller
+        should not free it.
   </para>
   <para>
         The function <function>z8530_get_stats</function> returns a pointer
diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index 619e8caf30db..c2371c5a98f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Here is a list of some of the different kernel trees available:
     - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
         git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
 
-    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com>
+    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com>
         git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
 
     - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
diff --git a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
index c2321903aa09..21bc416d887e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ IOVA generation is pretty generic. We used the same technique as vmalloc()
 but these are not global address spaces, but separate for each domain.
 Different DMA engines may support different number of domains.
 
-We also allocate gaurd pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch
+We also allocate guard pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch
 any overflow that might happen.
 
 
@@ -112,4 +112,4 @@ TBD
 
 - For compatibility testing, could use unity map domain for all devices, just
   provide a 1-1 for all useful memory under a single domain for all devices.
-- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionlity for VMM folks.
+- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionality for VMM folks.
diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..94b945733534
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
+        filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ networking/ \
+        pcmcia/ spi/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
index 118ca6e9404f..f79ad9ff6031 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
@@ -528,7 +528,33 @@ See more details on the proper patch format in the following
 references.
 
 
+16) Sending "git pull" requests  (from Linus emails)
 
+Please write the git repo address and branch name alone on the same line
+so that I can't even by mistake pull from the wrong branch, and so
+that a triple-click just selects the whole thing.
+
+So the proper format is something along the lines of:
+
+        "Please pull from
+
+                git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus
+
+         to get these changes:"
+
+so that I don't have to hunt-and-peck for the address and inevitably
+get it wrong (actually, I've only gotten it wrong a few times, and
+checking against the diffstat tells me when I get it wrong, but I'm
+just a lot more comfortable when I don't have to "look for" the right
+thing to pull, and double-check that I have the right branch-name).
+
+
+Please use "git diff -M --stat --summary" to generate the diffstat:
+the -M enables rename detection, and the summary enables a summary of
+new/deleted or renamed files.
+
+With rename detection, the statistics are rather different [...]
+because git will notice that a fair number of the changes are renames.
 
 -----------------------------------
 SECTION 2 - HINTS, TIPS, AND TRICKS
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/Makefile b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..31929eb875b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := getdelays
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_getdelays.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
index 1443cd71d263..8a12f0730c94 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ the delays experienced by a task while
 a) waiting for a CPU (while being runnable)
 b) completion of synchronous block I/O initiated by the task
 c) swapping in pages
+d) memory reclaim
 
 and makes these statistics available to userspace through
 the taskstats interface.
@@ -41,7 +42,7 @@ this structure. See
      include/linux/taskstats.h
 for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting.
 It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative
-delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin etc.
+delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin, memory reclaim etc.
 
 Taking the difference of two successive readings of a given
 counter (say cpu_delay_total) for a task will give the delay
@@ -94,7 +95,9 @@ CPU	count	real total	virtual total	delay total
         7876    92005750        100000000       24001500
 IO      count   delay total
         0       0
-MEM     count   delay total
+SWAP    count   delay total
+        0       0
+RECLAIM count   delay total
         0       0
 
 Get delays seen in executing a given simple command
@@ -108,5 +111,7 @@ CPU	count	real total	virtual total	delay total
         6       4000250         4000000         0
 IO      count   delay total
         0       0
-MEM     count   delay total
+SWAP    count   delay total
+        0       0
+RECLAIM count   delay total
         0       0
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
index 40121b5cca14..cc49400b4af8 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
@@ -196,14 +196,24 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t)
                "      %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n"
                "IO    %15s%15s\n"
                "      %15llu%15llu\n"
-               "MEM   %15s%15s\n"
+               "SWAP  %15s%15s\n"
+               "      %15llu%15llu\n"
+               "RECLAIM  %12s%15s\n"
                "      %15llu%15llu\n",
                "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total",
-               t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
-               t->cpu_delay_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_real_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_delay_total,
+               "count", "delay total",
+               (unsigned long long)t->blkio_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->blkio_delay_total,
+               "count", "delay total",
+               (unsigned long long)t->swapin_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->swapin_delay_total,
                "count", "delay total",
-               t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total,
-               "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total);
+               (unsigned long long)t->freepages_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->freepages_delay_total);
 }
 
 void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t)
@@ -211,14 +221,17 @@ void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t)
         printf("\n\nTask   %15s%15s\n"
                "       %15llu%15llu\n",
                "voluntary", "nonvoluntary",
-               t->nvcsw, t->nivcsw);
+               (unsigned long long)t->nvcsw, (unsigned long long)t->nivcsw);
 }
 
 void print_cgroupstats(struct cgroupstats *c)
 {
         printf("sleeping %llu, blocked %llu, running %llu, stopped %llu, "
-                "uninterruptible %llu\n", c->nr_sleeping, c->nr_io_wait,
-                c->nr_running, c->nr_stopped, c->nr_uninterruptible);
+                "uninterruptible %llu\n", (unsigned long long)c->nr_sleeping,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_io_wait,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_running,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_stopped,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_uninterruptible);
 }
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
index cd784f46bf8a..e7512c061c15 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ This document contains an explanation of the struct taskstats fields.
 There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
 
 1) Common and basic accounting fields
-    If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats inteface is enabled and
+    If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats interface is enabled and
     the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for
     delivery at do_exit() of a task.
 2) Delay accounting fields
@@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
 
 5) Time accounting for SMT machines
 
+6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
+
 Future extension should add fields to the end of the taskstats struct, and
 should not change the relative position of each field within the struct.
 
@@ -170,4 +172,9 @@ struct taskstats {
         __u64   ac_utimescaled;         /* utime scaled on frequency etc */
         __u64   ac_stimescaled;         /* stime scaled on frequency etc */
         __u64   cpu_scaled_run_real_total; /* scaled cpu_run_real_total */
+
+6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
+        /* Delay waiting for memory reclaim */
+        __u64   freepages_count;
+        __u64   freepages_delay_total;
 }
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
index 43edb4ecf27d..72fbcc4fcab0 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
+++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips:
 - Flash access (MTD/JFFS)
 - I2C through GPIO on IXP42x
 - GPIO for input/output/interrupts 
-  See include/asm-arm/arch-ixp4xx/platform.h for access functions.
+  See arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/include/mach/platform.h for access functions.
 - Timers (watchdog, OS)
 
 The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
index 0d3dbf1099bc..f09ab1b90ef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
@@ -138,14 +138,8 @@ So, what's changed?
 
                 Set active the IRQ edge(s)/level.  This replaces the
                 SA1111 INTPOL manipulation, and the set_GPIO_IRQ_edge()
-                function.  Type should be one of the following:
-
-                #define IRQT_NOEDGE     (0)
-                #define IRQT_RISING     (__IRQT_RISEDGE)
-                #define IRQT_FALLING    (__IRQT_FALEDGE)
-                #define IRQT_BOTHEDGE   (__IRQT_RISEDGE|__IRQT_FALEDGE)
-                #define IRQT_LOW        (__IRQT_LOWLVL)
-                #define IRQT_HIGH       (__IRQT_HIGHLVL)
+                function.  Type should be one of IRQ_TYPE_xxx defined in
+                <linux/irq.h>
 
 3. set_GPIO_IRQ_edge() is obsolete, and should be replaced by set_irq_type.
 
@@ -164,7 +158,7 @@ So, what's changed?
    be re-checked for pending events.  (see the Neponset IRQ handler for
    details).
 
-7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is include/asm-arm/arch-*/irq.h
+7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h
 
 Please note that this will not solve all problems - some of them are
 hardware based.  Mixing level-based and edge-based IRQs on the same
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/README b/Documentation/arm/README
index 9b9c8226fdc4..d98783fbe0c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/README
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Machine/Platform support
   To this end, we now have arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE) directories which are
   designed to house the non-driver files for a particular machine (eg, PCI,
   memory management, architecture definitions etc).  For all future
-  machines, there should be a corresponding include/asm-arm/arch-$(MACHINE)
+  machines, there should be a corresponding arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE)/include/mach
   directory.
 
 
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Kernel entry (head.S)
   class typically based around one or more system on a chip devices, and
   acts as a natural container around the actual implementations.  These
   classes are given directories - arch/arm/mach-<class> and
-  include/asm-arm/arch-<class> - which contain the source files to
+  arch/arm/mach-<class> - which contain the source files to/include/mach
   support the machine class.  This directories also contain any machine
   specific supporting code.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
index 8caea8c237ee..ea7ccfc4b274 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
@@ -13,16 +13,31 @@ Introduction
   data-sheet/users manual to find out the complete list.
 
 
+GPIOLIB
+-------
+
+  With the event of the GPIOLIB in drivers/gpio, support for some
+  of the GPIO functions such as reading and writing a pin will
+  be removed in favour of this common access method.
+
+  Once all the extant drivers have been converted, the functions
+  listed below will be removed (they may be marked as __deprecated
+  in the near future).
+
+  - s3c2410_gpio_getpin
+  - s3c2410_gpio_setpin
+
+
 Headers
 -------
 
-  See include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/regs-gpio.h for the list
+  See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/regs-gpio.h for the list
   of GPIO pins, and the configuration values for them. This
-  is included by using #include <asm/arch/regs-gpio.h>
+  is included by using #include <mach/regs-gpio.h>
 
   The GPIO management functions are defined in the hardware
-  header include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/hardware.h which can be
-  included by #include <asm/arch/hardware.h>
+  header arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/hardware.h which can be
+  included by #include <mach/hardware.h>
 
   A useful amount of documentation can be found in the hardware
   header on how the GPIO functions (and others) work.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
index d04e1e30c47f..cff6227b4484 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
@@ -8,9 +8,10 @@ Introduction
 
   The Samsung S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs are supported
   by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410,
-  S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported.
+  S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440, S3C2442 and S3C2443 devices are supported.
+
+  Support for the S3C2400 and S3C24A0 series are in progress.
 
-  Support for the S3C2400 series is in progress.
 
 Configuration
 -------------
@@ -36,7 +37,23 @@ Layout
   in arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 and S3C2440 in arch/arm/mach-s3c2440
 
   Register, kernel and platform data definitions are held in the
-  include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410 directory.
+  arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 directory./include/mach
+
+arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx:
+
+  Files in here are either common to all the s3c24xx family,
+  or are common to only some of them with names to indicate this
+  status. The files that are not common to all are generally named
+  with the initial cpu they support in the series to ensure a short
+  name without any possibility of confusion with newer devices.
+
+  As an example, initially s3c244x would cover s3c2440 and s3c2442, but
+  with the s3c2443 which does not share many of the same drivers in
+  this directory, the name becomes invalid. We stick to s3c2440-<x>
+  to indicate a driver that is s3c2440 and s3c2442 compatible.
+
+  This does mean that to find the status of any given SoC, a number
+  of directories may need to be searched.
 
 
 Machines
@@ -159,6 +176,17 @@ NAND
   For more information see Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
 
 
+SD/MMC
+------
+
+  The SD/MMC hardware pre S3C2443 is supported in the current
+  kernel, the driver is drivers/mmc/host/s3cmci.c and supports
+  1 and 4 bit SD or MMC cards.
+
+  The SDIO behaviour of this driver has not been fully tested. There is no
+  current support for hardware SDIO interrupts.
+
+
 Serial
 ------
 
@@ -178,6 +206,9 @@ GPIO
   The core contains support for manipulating the GPIO, see the
   documentation in GPIO.txt in the same directory as this file.
 
+  Newer kernels carry GPIOLIB, and support is being moved towards
+  this with some of the older support in line to be removed.
+
 
 Clock Management
 ----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
index b93b68e2b143..67671eba4231 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Board Support
 Platform Data
 -------------
 
-  See linux/include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/usb-control.h for the
+  See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/usb-control.h for the
   descriptions of the platform device data. An implementation
   can be found in linux/arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/usb-simtec.c .
 
diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..51fe23332c81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := cfag12864b-example
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_cfag12864b-example.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8297e4ebd26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+===============================================================
+==  BT8XXGPIO driver                                         ==
+==                                                           ==
+==  A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card  ==
+==                                                           ==
+==  For advanced documentation, see                          ==
+==  http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php                          ==
+===============================================================
+
+
+A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary
+Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The
+Brooktree chip is used in old analog Hauppauge WinTV PCI cards. You can easily
+find them used for low prices on the net.
+
+The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports.
+These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package.
+
+
+==============================================
+==  How to physically access the GPIO pins  ==
+==============================================
+
+The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip
+and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual
+GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny
+there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case.
+
+The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art.
+The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23
+
+                                           G G G G G G G G G G G G     G G G G G G
+                                           0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1     1 1 1 1 1 1
+                                           0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1     2 3 4 5 6 7
+           | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+           ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+         --|                               ^                                     ^   |--
+         --|                               pin 86                           pin 67   |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                               pin 61 >  |-- G18
+         --|                                                                         |-- G19
+         --|                                                                         |-- G20
+         --|                                                                         |-- G21
+         --|                                                                         |-- G22
+         --|                                                               pin 56 >  |-- G23
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                           Brooktree 878/879                             |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+         --|   O                                                                     |--
+         --|                                                                         |--
+           ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+           | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+           ^
+           This is pin 1
+
diff --git a/Documentation/cciss.txt b/Documentation/cciss.txt
index 63e59b8847c5..8244c6442faa 100644
--- a/Documentation/cciss.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cciss.txt
@@ -112,27 +112,18 @@ Hot plug support for SCSI tape drives
 
 Hot plugging of SCSI tape drives is supported, with some caveats.
 The cciss driver must be informed that changes to the SCSI bus
-have been made, in addition to and prior to informing the SCSI 
-mid layer.  This may be done via the /proc filesystem.  For example:
+have been made.  This may be done via the /proc filesystem.
+For example:
 
         echo "rescan" > /proc/scsi/cciss0/1
 
-This causes the adapter to query the adapter about changes to the 
-physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the 
+This causes the driver to query the adapter about changes to the
+physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the
 driver to make note of any new or removed sequential access devices
 or medium changers.  The driver will output messages indicating what 
 devices have been added or removed and the controller, bus, target and 
-lun used to address the device.  Once this is done, the SCSI mid layer 
-can be informed of changes to the virtual SCSI bus which the driver 
-presents to it in the usual way. For example: 
-
-        echo scsi add-single-device 3 2 1 0 > /proc/scsi/scsi
- 
-to add a device on controller 3, bus 2, target 1, lun 0.   Note that
-the driver makes an effort to preserve the devices positions
-in the virtual SCSI bus, so if you are only moving tape drives 
-around on the same adapter and not adding or removing tape drives 
-from the adapter, informing the SCSI mid layer may not be necessary.
+lun used to address the device.  It then notifies the SCSI mid layer
+of these changes.
 
 Note that the naming convention of the /proc filesystem entries 
 contains a number in addition to the driver name.  (E.g. "cciss0" 
diff --git a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt b/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 60932b02fcb3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-
-#### cli()/sti() removal guide, started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
-
-
-as of 2.5.28, five popular macros have been removed on SMP, and
-are being phased out on UP:
-
- cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags), save_flags_cli(flags), restore_flags(flags)
-
-until now it was possible to protect driver code against interrupt
-handlers via a cli(), but from now on other, more lightweight methods
-have to be used for synchronization, such as spinlocks or semaphores.
-
-for example, driver code that used to do something like:
-
-        struct driver_data;
-
-        irq_handler (...)
-        {
-                ....
-                driver_data.finish = 1;
-                driver_data.new_work = 0;
-                ....
-        }
-
-        ...
-
-        ioctl_func (...)
-        {
-                ...
-                cli();
-                ...
-                driver_data.finish = 0;
-                driver_data.new_work = 2;
-                ...
-                sti();
-                ...
-        }
-
-was SMP-correct because the cli() function ensured that no
-interrupt handler (amongst them the above irq_handler()) function
-would execute while the cli()-ed section is executing.
-
-but from now on a more direct method of locking has to be used:
-
-        DEFINE_SPINLOCK(driver_lock);
-        struct driver_data;
-
-        irq_handler (...)
-        {
-                unsigned long flags;
-                ....
-                spin_lock_irqsave(&driver_lock, flags);
-                ....
-                driver_data.finish = 1;
-                driver_data.new_work = 0;
-                ....
-                spin_unlock_irqrestore(&driver_lock, flags);
-                ....
-        }
-
-        ...
-
-        ioctl_func (...)
-        {
-                ...
-                spin_lock_irq(&driver_lock);
-                ...
-                driver_data.finish = 0;
-                driver_data.new_work = 2;
-                ...
-                spin_unlock_irq(&driver_lock);
-                ...
-        }
-
-the above code has a number of advantages:
-
-- the locking relation is easier to understand - actual lock usage
-  pinpoints the critical sections. cli() usage is too opaque.
-  Easier to understand means it's easier to debug.
-
-- it's faster, because spinlocks are faster to acquire than the
-  potentially heavily-used IRQ lock. Furthermore, your driver does
-  not have to wait eg. for a big heavy SCSI interrupt to finish,
-  because the driver_lock spinlock is only used by your driver.
-  cli() on the other hand was used by many drivers, and extended
-  the critical section to the whole IRQ handler function - creating
-  serious lock contention.
-
- 
-to make the transition easier, we've still kept the cli(), sti(),
-save_flags(), save_flags_cli() and restore_flags() macros defined
-on UP systems - but their usage will be phased out until 2.6 is
-released.
-
-drivers that want to disable local interrupts (interrupts on the
-current CPU), can use the following five macros:
-
-  local_irq_disable(), local_irq_enable(), local_save_flags(flags),
-  local_irq_save(flags), local_irq_restore(flags)
-
-but beware, their meaning and semantics are much simpler, far from
-that of the old cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags) and restore_flags(flags)
-SMP meaning:
-
-    local_irq_disable()       => turn local IRQs off
-
-    local_irq_enable()        => turn local IRQs on
-
-    local_save_flags(flags)   => save the current IRQ state into flags. The
-                                 state can be on or off. (on some
-                                 architectures there's even more bits in it.)
-
-    local_irq_save(flags)     => save the current IRQ state into flags and
-                                 disable interrupts.
-
-    local_irq_restore(flags)  => restore the IRQ state from flags.
-
-(local_irq_save can save both irqs on and irqs off state, and
-local_irq_restore can restore into both irqs on and irqs off state.)
-
-another related change is that synchronize_irq() now takes a parameter:
-synchronize_irq(irq). This change too has the purpose of making SMP
-synchronization more lightweight - this way you can wait for your own
-interrupt handler to finish, no need to wait for other IRQ sources.
-
-
-why were these changes done? The main reason was the architectural burden
-of maintaining the cli()/sti() interface - it became a real problem. The
-new interrupt system is much more streamlined, easier to understand, debug,
-and it's also a bit faster - the same happened to it that will happen to
-cli()/sti() using drivers once they convert to spinlocks :-)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/Makefile b/Documentation/connector/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8df1a7285a06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/connector/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONNECTOR),)
+obj-m += cn_test.o
+endif
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := ucon
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_ucon.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
index 866b9cd9a959..9b53d5827361 100644
--- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
@@ -242,8 +242,7 @@ rmdir() if there are no tasks.
 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
 3. Teach controller to account for shared-pages
-4. Start reclamation when the limit is lowered
-5. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
+4. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
    not yet hit but the usage is getting closer
 
 Summary
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
index dcec0564d040..5b0cfa67aff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ around '10000' or more.
 show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates
 available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to.
 
-up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usaged between the samplings
+up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usage between the samplings
 of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on
 whether it should increase the frequency.  For example when it is set
 to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
index ba0aacde94fb..94bbc27ddd4f 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
@@ -59,15 +59,10 @@ apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't
 mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this
 parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map.
 
-s390 uses the number of cpus it detects at IPL time to also the number of bits
-in cpu_possible_map. If it is desired to add additional cpus at a later time
-the number should be specified using this option or the possible_cpus option.
-
 possible_cpus=n         [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
                         This option sets possible_cpus bits in
                         cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set
                         constant even if the machine gets rebooted.
-                        This option overrides additional_cpus.
 
 CPU maps and such
 -----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt
index e6244cde26e9..05c80645e4ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devices.txt
@@ -2560,9 +2560,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
                  96 = /dev/usb/hiddev0  1st USB HID device
                     ...
                 111 = /dev/usb/hiddev15 16th USB HID device
-                112 = /dev/usb/auer0    1st auerswald ISDN device
-                    ...
-                127 = /dev/usb/auer15   16th auerswald ISDN device
                 128 = /dev/usb/brlvgr0  First Braille Voyager device
                     ...
                 131 = /dev/usb/brlvgr3  Fourth Braille Voyager device
diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt
index a5c36842ecef..8eda3fb66416 100644
--- a/Documentation/edac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/edac.txt
@@ -222,74 +222,9 @@ both csrow2 and csrow3 are populated, this indicates a dual ranked
 set of DIMMs for channels 0 and 1.
 
 
-Within each of the 'mc','mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several
+Within each of the 'mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several
 EDAC control and attribute files.
 
-
-============================================================================
-DIRECTORY 'mc'
-
-In directory 'mc' are EDAC system overall control and attribute files:
-
-
-Panic on UE control file:
-
-        'edac_mc_panic_on_ue'
-
-        An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic.  This is usually
-        desirable.  It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error
-        occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating
-        system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further
-        corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never
-        notice the UE.
-
-        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: panic_on_ue=[0|1]
-
-        RUN TIME:  echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_panic_on_ue
-
-
-Log UE control file:
-
-        'edac_mc_log_ue'
-
-        Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors.  These errors
-        are reported through the system message log system.  UE statistics
-        will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled.
-
-        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ue=[0|1]
-
-        RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ue
-
-
-Log CE control file:
-
-        'edac_mc_log_ce'
-
-        Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors.  These
-        errors are reported through the system message log system.
-        CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled.
-
-        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ce=[0|1]
-
-        RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ce
-
-
-Polling period control file:
-
-        'edac_mc_poll_msec'
-
-        The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
-        Too small a value wastes resources.  Too large a value might delay
-        necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
-        locating the error.  1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
-        default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
-        increase this.
-
-        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: poll_msec=[0|1]
-
-        RUN TIME: echo "1000" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_poll_msec
-
-
 ============================================================================
 'mcX' DIRECTORIES
 
@@ -392,7 +327,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate:
         'sdram_scrub_rate'
 
         Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing
-        rate is set by writing a minimum bandwith in bytes/sec to the attribute
+        rate is set by writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute
         file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at
         least the specified rate.
 
@@ -537,7 +472,6 @@ Channel 1 DIMM Label control file:
         motherboard specific and determination of this information
         must occur in userland at this time.
 
-
 ============================================================================
 SYSTEM LOGGING
 
@@ -570,7 +504,6 @@ error type, a notice of "no info" and then an optional,
 driver-specific error message.
 
 
-
 ============================================================================
 PCI Bus Parity Detection
 
@@ -604,6 +537,74 @@ Enable/Disable PCI Parity checking control file:
         echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/check_pci_parity
 
 
+Parity Count:
+
+        'pci_parity_count'
+
+        This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that
+        have been detected.
+
+
+============================================================================
+MODULE PARAMETERS
+
+Panic on UE control file:
+
+        'edac_mc_panic_on_ue'
+
+        An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic.  This is usually
+        desirable.  It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error
+        occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating
+        system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further
+        corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never
+        notice the UE.
+
+        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_panic_on_ue=[0|1]
+
+        RUN TIME:  echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_panic_on_ue
+
+
+Log UE control file:
+
+        'edac_mc_log_ue'
+
+        Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors.  These errors
+        are reported through the system message log system.  UE statistics
+        will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled.
+
+        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ue=[0|1]
+
+        RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ue
+
+
+Log CE control file:
+
+        'edac_mc_log_ce'
+
+        Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors.  These
+        errors are reported through the system message log system.
+        CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled.
+
+        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ce=[0|1]
+
+        RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ce
+
+
+Polling period control file:
+
+        'edac_mc_poll_msec'
+
+        The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
+        Too small a value wastes resources.  Too large a value might delay
+        necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
+        locating the error.  1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
+        default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
+        increase this.
+
+        LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_poll_msec=[0|1]
+
+        RUN TIME: echo "1000" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_poll_msec
+
 
 Panic on PCI PARITY Error:
 
@@ -614,21 +615,13 @@ Panic on PCI PARITY Error:
         error has been detected.
 
 
-        module/kernel parameter: panic_on_pci_parity=[0|1]
+        module/kernel parameter: edac_panic_on_pci_pe=[0|1]
 
         Enable:
-        echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity
+        echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe
 
         Disable:
-        echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity
-
-
-Parity Count:
-
-        'pci_parity_count'
-
-        This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that
-        have been detected.
+        echo "0" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe
 
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c87bfe5c630a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver
+================================================
+
+0. Overwiew
+-----------
+The SH7760/SH7763 have an integrated LCD Display controller (LCDC) which
+supports (in theory) resolutions ranging from 1x1 to 1024x1024,
+with color depths ranging from 1 to 16 bits, on STN, DSTN and TFT Panels.
+
+Caveats:
+* Framebuffer memory must be a large chunk allocated at the top
+  of Area3 (HW requirement). Because of this requirement you should NOT
+  make the driver a module since at runtime it may become impossible to
+  get a large enough contiguous chunk of memory.
+
+* The driver does not support changing resolution while loaded
+  (displays aren't hotpluggable anyway)
+
+* Heavy flickering may be observed
+  a) if you're using 15/16bit color modes at >= 640x480 px resolutions,
+  b) during PCMCIA (or any other slow bus) activity.
+
+* Rotation works only 90degress clockwise, and only if horizontal
+  resolution is <= 320 pixels.
+
+files:   drivers/video/sh7760fb.c
+        include/asm-sh/sh7760fb.h
+        Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
+
+1. Platform setup
+-----------------
+SH7760:
+ Video data is fetched via the DMABRG DMA engine, so you have to
+ configure the SH DMAC for DMABRG mode (write 0x94808080 to the
+ DMARSRA register somewhere at boot).
+
+ PFC registers PCCR and PCDR must be set to peripheral mode.
+ (write zeros to both).
+
+The driver does NOT do the above for you since board setup is, well, job
+of the board setup code.
+
+2. Panel definitions
+--------------------
+The LCDC must explicitly be told about the type of LCD panel
+attached.  Data must be wrapped in a "struct sh7760fb_platdata" and
+passed to the driver as platform_data.
+
+Suggest you take a closer look at the SH7760 Manual, Section 30.
+(http://documentation.renesas.com/eng/products/mpumcu/e602291_sh7760.pdf)
+
+The following code illustrates what needs to be done to
+get the framebuffer working on a 640x480 TFT:
+
+====================== cut here ======================================
+
+#include <linux/fb.h>
+#include <asm/sh7760fb.h>
+
+/*
+ * NEC NL6440bc26-01 640x480 TFT
+ * dotclock 25175 kHz
+ * Xres                640     Yres            480
+ * Htotal      800     Vtotal          525
+ * HsynStart   656     VsynStart       490
+ * HsynLenn    30      VsynLenn        2
+ *
+ * The linux framebuffer layer does not use the syncstart/synclen
+ * values but right/left/upper/lower margin values. The comments
+ * for the x_margin explain how to calculate those from given
+ * panel sync timings.
+ */
+static struct fb_videomode nl6448bc26 = {
+       .name           = "NL6448BC26",
+       .refresh        = 60,
+       .xres           = 640,
+       .yres           = 480,
+       .pixclock       = 39683,        /* in picoseconds! */
+       .hsync_len      = 30,
+       .vsync_len      = 2,
+       .left_margin    = 114,  /* HTOT - (HSYNSLEN + HSYNSTART) */
+       .right_margin   = 16,   /* HSYNSTART - XRES */
+       .upper_margin   = 33,   /* VTOT - (VSYNLEN + VSYNSTART) */
+       .lower_margin   = 10,   /* VSYNSTART - YRES */
+       .sync           = FB_SYNC_HOR_HIGH_ACT | FB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH_ACT,
+       .vmode          = FB_VMODE_NONINTERLACED,
+       .flag           = 0,
+};
+
+static struct sh7760fb_platdata sh7760fb_nl6448 = {
+       .def_mode       = &nl6448bc26,
+       .ldmtr          = LDMTR_TFT_COLOR_16,   /* 16bit TFT panel */
+       .lddfr          = LDDFR_8BPP,           /* we want 8bit output */
+       .ldpmmr         = 0x0070,
+       .ldpspr         = 0x0500,
+       .ldaclnr        = 0,
+       .ldickr         = LDICKR_CLKSRC(LCDC_CLKSRC_EXTERNAL) |
+                         LDICKR_CLKDIV(1),
+       .rotate         = 0,
+       .novsync        = 1,
+       .blank          = NULL,
+};
+
+/* SH7760:
+ * 0xFE300800: 256 * 4byte xRGB palette ram
+ * 0xFE300C00: 42 bytes ctrl registers
+ */
+static struct resource sh7760_lcdc_res[] = {
+       [0] = {
+               .start  = 0xFE300800,
+               .end    = 0xFE300CFF,
+               .flags  = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+       },
+       [1] = {
+               .start  = 65,
+               .end    = 65,
+               .flags  = IORESOURCE_IRQ,
+       },
+};
+
+static struct platform_device sh7760_lcdc_dev = {
+       .dev    = {
+               .platform_data = &sh7760fb_nl6448,
+       },
+       .name           = "sh7760-lcdc",
+       .id             = -1,
+       .resource       = sh7760_lcdc_res,
+       .num_resources  = ARRAY_SIZE(sh7760_lcdc_res),
+};
+
+====================== cut here ======================================
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
index 8a6c8a43e6a3..45d9de5b13a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
@@ -3,11 +3,25 @@ Tridentfb is a framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards.
 The following list of chips is thought to be supported although not all are
 tested:
 
-those from the Image series with Cyber in their names - accelerated
-those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...) - accelerated
-the newer CyberBladeXP family  - nonaccelerated
-
-Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported, none of the older Tridents.
+those from the TGUI series 9440/96XX and with Cyber in their names
+those from the Image series and with Cyber in their names
+those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...)
+the newer CyberBladeXP family
+
+All families are accelerated. Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported,
+none of the older Tridents.
+The driver supports 8, 16 and 32 bits per pixel depths.
+The TGUI family requires a line length to be power of 2 if acceleration
+is enabled. This means that range of possible resolutions and bpp is
+limited comparing to the range if acceleration is disabled (see list
+of parameters below).
+
+Known bugs:
+1. The driver randomly locks up on 3DImage975 chip with acceleration
+   enabled. The same happens in X11 (Xorg).
+2. The ramdac speeds require some more fine tuning. It is possible to
+   switch resolution which the chip does not support at some depths for
+   older chips.
 
 How to use it?
 ==============
@@ -17,12 +31,11 @@ video=tridentfb
 
 The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example.
 
-video=tridentfb:800x600,bpp=16,noaccel
+video=tridentfb:800x600-16@75,noaccel
 
 The second level parameters that tridentfb understands are:
 
 noaccel - turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card)
-accel - force text acceleration (for boards which by default are noacceled)
 
 fp      - use flat panel related stuff
 crt     - assume monitor is present instead of fp
@@ -31,21 +44,24 @@ center 	- for flat panels and resolutions smaller than native size center the
           image, otherwise use
 stretch
 
-memsize - integer value in Kb, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
+memsize - integer value in KB, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
           look at the driver output to see what it says when initializing.
-memdiff - integer value in Kb,should be nonzero if your card reports
-          more memory than it actually has.For instance mine is 192K less than
+
+memdiff - integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports
+          more memory than it actually has. For instance mine is 192K less than
           detection says in all three BIOS selectable situations 2M, 4M, 8M.
           Only use if your video memory is taken from main memory hence of
-          configurable size.Otherwise use memsize.
-          If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage at the bottom
-          this might help by not letting change to that mode anymore.
+          configurable size. Otherwise use memsize.
+          If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage
+          at the bottom this might help by not letting change to that mode
+          anymore.
 
 nativex - the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024
           800 or 1280) and it is not what the driver seems to detect use it.
 
-bpp  - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
-mode - a mode name like 800x600 (as described in Documentation/fb/modedb.txt)
+bpp     - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
+mode    - a mode name like 800x600-8@75 as described in
+          Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
 
 Using insane values for the above parameters will probably result in driver
 misbehaviour so take care(for instance memsize=12345678 or memdiff=23784 or
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index 9f73587219e8..eb1a47b97427 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -19,15 +19,6 @@ Who:	Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:   old NCR53C9x driver
-When:   October 2007
-Why:    Replaced by the much better esp_scsi driver.  Actual low-level
-        driver can be ported over almost trivially.
-Who:    David Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
-        Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and video_decoder.h from Video devices.
 When:   December 2008
 Files:  include/linux/video_decoder.h include/linux/videodev.h
@@ -47,6 +38,30 @@ Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
 
 ---------------------------
 
+What:   old tuner-3036 i2c driver
+When:   2.6.28
+Why:    This driver is for VERY old i2c-over-parallel port teletext receiver
+        boxes. Rather then spending effort on converting this driver to V4L2,
+        and since it is extremely unlikely that anyone still uses one of these
+        devices, it was decided to drop it.
+Who:    Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
+        Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+
+ ---------------------------
+
+What:   V4L2 dpc7146 driver
+When:   2.6.28
+Why:    Old driver for the dpc7146 demonstration board that is no longer
+        relevant. The last time this was tested on actual hardware was
+        probably around 2002. Since this is a driver for a demonstration
+        board the decision was made to remove it rather than spending a
+        lot of effort continually updating this driver to stay in sync
+        with the latest internal V4L2 or I2C API.
+Who:    Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
+        Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:   PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl])
 When:   November 2005
 Files:  drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c
@@ -138,24 +153,6 @@ Who:	Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@suse.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:   find_task_by_pid
-When:   2.6.26
-Why:    With pid namespaces, calling this funciton will return the
-        wrong task when called from inside a namespace.
-
-        The best way to save a task pid and find a task by this
-        pid later, is to find this task's struct pid pointer (or get
-        it directly from the task) and call pid_task() later.
-
-        If someone really needs to get a task by its pid_t, then
-        he most likely needs the find_task_by_vpid() to get the
-        task from the same namespace as the current task is in, but
-        this may be not so in general.
-
-Who:    Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   ACPI procfs interface
 When:   July 2008
 Why:    ACPI sysfs conversion should be finished by January 2008.
@@ -199,19 +196,6 @@ Who:  Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What: The arch/ppc and include/asm-ppc directories
-When: Jun 2008
-Why:  The arch/powerpc tree is the merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64
-      platforms.  Currently there are efforts underway to port the remaining
-      arch/ppc platforms to the merged tree.  New submissions to the arch/ppc
-      tree have been frozen with the 2.6.22 kernel release and that tree will
-      remain in bug-fix only mode until its scheduled removal.  Platforms
-      that are not ported by June 2008 will be removed due to the lack of an
-      interested maintainer.
-Who:  linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks
 When:   April 2010
 
@@ -300,14 +284,6 @@ Who:	ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:   asm/semaphore.h
-When:   2.6.26
-Why:    Implementation became generic; users should now include
-        linux/semaphore.h instead.
-Who:    Matthew Wilcox <willy@linux.intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_OLD,
         SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_OLD
 When:   June 2009
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 8b22d7d8b991..680fb566b928 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -510,6 +510,7 @@ prototypes:
         void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*);
         int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *);
         int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct page *);
+        int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int);
 
 locking rules:
                 BKL     mmap_sem        PageLocked(page)
@@ -517,6 +518,7 @@ open:		no	yes
 close:          no      yes
 fault:          no      yes
 page_mkwrite:   no      yes             no
+access:         no      yes
 
         ->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only page is
 about to become writeable. The file system is responsible for
@@ -525,6 +527,11 @@ taking to lock out truncate, the page range should be verified to be
 within i_size. The page mapping should also be checked that it is not
 NULL.
 
+        ->access() is called when get_user_pages() fails in
+acces_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through
+/proc/pid/mem or ptrace.  This function is needed only for
+VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs.
+
 ================================================================================
                         Dubious stuff
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt
index ea825e178e79..78043d5a8fc3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt
@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ You can simplify mounting by just typing:
 
 this will allocate the first available loopback device (and load loop.o 
 kernel module if necessary) automatically. If the loopback driver is not
-loaded automatically, make sure that your kernel is compiled with kmod 
-support (CONFIG_KMOD) enabled. Beware that umount will not
-deallocate /dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a
-symbolic link to /proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using
-"-d" switch of losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info.
+loaded automatically, make sure that you have compiled the module and
+that modprobe is functioning. Beware that umount will not deallocate
+/dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a symbolic link to
+/proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using "-d" switch of
+losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info.
 
 To create the BFS image under UnixWare you need to find out first which
 slice contains it. The command prtvtoc(1M) is your friend:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..be7ec5e67dbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONFIGFS_FS),)
+obj-m += configfs_example_explicit.o configfs_example_macros.o
+endif
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
index 44c97e6accb2..fabcb0e00f25 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
@@ -311,9 +311,20 @@ the subsystem must be ready for it.
 [An Example]
 
 The best example of these basic concepts is the simple_children
-subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example.c  It
-shows a trivial object displaying and storing an attribute, and a simple
-group creating and destroying these children.
+subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example_explicit.c
+and configfs_example_macros.c.  It shows a trivial object displaying and
+storing an attribute, and a simple group creating and destroying these
+children.
+
+The only difference between configfs_example_explicit.c and
+configfs_example_macros.c is how the attributes of the childless item
+are defined.  The childless item has extended attributes, each with
+their own show()/store() operation.  This follows a convention commonly
+used in sysfs.  configfs_example_explicit.c creates these attributes
+by explicitly defining the structures involved.  Conversely
+configfs_example_macros.c uses some convenience macros from configfs.h
+to define the attributes.  These macros are similar to their sysfs
+counterparts.
 
 [Hierarchy Navigation and the Subsystem Mutex]
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c
index 039648791701..d428cc9f07f3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
 /*
  * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8:
  *
- * configfs_example.c - This file is a demonstration module containing
- *      a number of configfs subsystems.
+ * configfs_example_explicit.c - This file is a demonstration module
+ *      containing a number of configfs subsystems.  It explicitly defines
+ *      each structure without using the helper macros defined in
+ *      configfs.h.
  *
  * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
  * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
@@ -281,7 +283,6 @@ static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group,
         if (!simple_child)
                 return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
 
-
         config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
                                    &simple_child_type);
 
@@ -302,8 +303,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = {
 };
 
 static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
-                                         struct configfs_attribute *attr,
-                                         char *page)
+                                         struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                         char *page)
 {
         return sprintf(page,
 "[02-simple-children]\n"
@@ -318,7 +319,7 @@ static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item)
 }
 
 static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = {
-        .release        = simple_children_release,
+        .release        = simple_children_release,
         .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show,
 };
 
@@ -368,7 +369,6 @@ static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group
         if (!simple_children)
                 return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
 
-
         config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,
                                     &simple_children_type);
 
@@ -387,8 +387,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = {
 };
 
 static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
-                                        struct configfs_attribute *attr,
-                                        char *page)
+                                        struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                        char *page)
 {
         return sprintf(page,
 "[03-group-children]\n"
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8e30a0378aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+/*
+ * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8:
+ *
+ * configfs_example_macros.c - This file is a demonstration module
+ *      containing a number of configfs subsystems.  It uses the helper
+ *      macros defined by configfs.h
+ *
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+ * License along with this program; if not, write to the
+ * Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+ * Boston, MA 021110-1307, USA.
+ *
+ * Based on sysfs:
+ *      sysfs is Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003 Patrick Mochel
+ *
+ * configfs Copyright (C) 2005 Oracle.  All rights reserved.
+ */
+
+#include <linux/init.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/slab.h>
+
+#include <linux/configfs.h>
+
+
+
+/*
+ * 01-childless
+ *
+ * This first example is a childless subsystem.  It cannot create
+ * any config_items.  It just has attributes.
+ *
+ * Note that we are enclosing the configfs_subsystem inside a container.
+ * This is not necessary if a subsystem has no attributes directly
+ * on the subsystem.  See the next example, 02-simple-children, for
+ * such a subsystem.
+ */
+
+struct childless {
+        struct configfs_subsystem subsys;
+        int showme;
+        int storeme;
+};
+
+static inline struct childless *to_childless(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        return item ? container_of(to_configfs_subsystem(to_config_group(item)), struct childless, subsys) : NULL;
+}
+
+CONFIGFS_ATTR_STRUCT(childless);
+#define CHILDLESS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)     \
+struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)
+#define CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show) \
+struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show);
+
+static ssize_t childless_showme_read(struct childless *childless,
+                                     char *page)
+{
+        ssize_t pos;
+
+        pos = sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->showme);
+        childless->showme++;
+
+        return pos;
+}
+
+static ssize_t childless_storeme_read(struct childless *childless,
+                                      char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->storeme);
+}
+
+static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless,
+                                       const char *page,
+                                       size_t count)
+{
+        unsigned long tmp;
+        char *p = (char *) page;
+
+        tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10);
+        if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n')))
+                return -EINVAL;
+
+        if (tmp > INT_MAX)
+                return -ERANGE;
+
+        childless->storeme = tmp;
+
+        return count;
+}
+
+static ssize_t childless_description_read(struct childless *childless,
+                                          char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page,
+"[01-childless]\n"
+"\n"
+"The childless subsystem is the simplest possible subsystem in\n"
+"configfs.  It does not support the creation of child config_items.\n"
+"It only has a few attributes.  In fact, it isn't much different\n"
+"than a directory in /proc.\n");
+}
+
+CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(showme, childless_showme_read);
+CHILDLESS_ATTR(storeme, S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR, childless_storeme_read,
+               childless_storeme_write);
+CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(description, childless_description_read);
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *childless_attrs[] = {
+        &childless_attr_showme.attr,
+        &childless_attr_storeme.attr,
+        &childless_attr_description.attr,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+CONFIGFS_ATTR_OPS(childless);
+static struct configfs_item_operations childless_item_ops = {
+        .show_attribute         = childless_attr_show,
+        .store_attribute        = childless_attr_store,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type childless_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &childless_item_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = childless_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+static struct childless childless_subsys = {
+        .subsys = {
+                .su_group = {
+                        .cg_item = {
+                                .ci_namebuf = "01-childless",
+                                .ci_type = &childless_type,
+                        },
+                },
+        },
+};
+
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * 02-simple-children
+ *
+ * This example merely has a simple one-attribute child.  Note that
+ * there is no extra attribute structure, as the child's attribute is
+ * known from the get-go.  Also, there is no container for the
+ * subsystem, as it has no attributes of its own.
+ */
+
+struct simple_child {
+        struct config_item item;
+        int storeme;
+};
+
+static inline struct simple_child *to_simple_child(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        return item ? container_of(item, struct simple_child, item) : NULL;
+}
+
+static struct configfs_attribute simple_child_attr_storeme = {
+        .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
+        .ca_name = "storeme",
+        .ca_mode = S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *simple_child_attrs[] = {
+        &simple_child_attr_storeme,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static ssize_t simple_child_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
+                                      struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                      char *page)
+{
+        ssize_t count;
+        struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item);
+
+        count = sprintf(page, "%d\n", simple_child->storeme);
+
+        return count;
+}
+
+static ssize_t simple_child_attr_store(struct config_item *item,
+                                       struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                       const char *page, size_t count)
+{
+        struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item);
+        unsigned long tmp;
+        char *p = (char *) page;
+
+        tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10);
+        if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n')))
+                return -EINVAL;
+
+        if (tmp > INT_MAX)
+                return -ERANGE;
+
+        simple_child->storeme = tmp;
+
+        return count;
+}
+
+static void simple_child_release(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        kfree(to_simple_child(item));
+}
+
+static struct configfs_item_operations simple_child_item_ops = {
+        .release                = simple_child_release,
+        .show_attribute         = simple_child_attr_show,
+        .store_attribute        = simple_child_attr_store,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type simple_child_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &simple_child_item_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = simple_child_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+
+struct simple_children {
+        struct config_group group;
+};
+
+static inline struct simple_children *to_simple_children(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL;
+}
+
+static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
+{
+        struct simple_child *simple_child;
+
+        simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (!simple_child)
+                return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
+
+        config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
+                                   &simple_child_type);
+
+        simple_child->storeme = 0;
+
+        return &simple_child->item;
+}
+
+static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = {
+        .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
+        .ca_name = "description",
+        .ca_mode = S_IRUGO,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = {
+        &simple_children_attr_description,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
+                                         struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                         char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page,
+"[02-simple-children]\n"
+"\n"
+"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_items.  These\n"
+"items have only one attribute that is readable and writeable.\n");
+}
+
+static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        kfree(to_simple_children(item));
+}
+
+static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = {
+        .release        = simple_children_release,
+        .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show,
+};
+
+/*
+ * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(),
+ * no ->drop_item() is provided.
+ */
+static struct configfs_group_operations simple_children_group_ops = {
+        .make_item      = simple_children_make_item,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type simple_children_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &simple_children_item_ops,
+        .ct_group_ops   = &simple_children_group_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = simple_children_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = {
+        .su_group = {
+                .cg_item = {
+                        .ci_namebuf = "02-simple-children",
+                        .ci_type = &simple_children_type,
+                },
+        },
+};
+
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * 03-group-children
+ *
+ * This example reuses the simple_children group from above.  However,
+ * the simple_children group is not the subsystem itself, it is a
+ * child of the subsystem.  Creation of a group in the subsystem creates
+ * a new simple_children group.  That group can then have simple_child
+ * children of its own.
+ */
+
+static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
+{
+        struct simple_children *simple_children;
+
+        simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children),
+                                  GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (!simple_children)
+                return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
+
+        config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,
+                                    &simple_children_type);
+
+        return &simple_children->group;
+}
+
+static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = {
+        .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
+        .ca_name = "description",
+        .ca_mode = S_IRUGO,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = {
+        &group_children_attr_description,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
+                                        struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                        char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page,
+"[03-group-children]\n"
+"\n"
+"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_groups.  These\n"
+"groups are like the subsystem simple-children.\n");
+}
+
+static struct configfs_item_operations group_children_item_ops = {
+        .show_attribute = group_children_attr_show,
+};
+
+/*
+ * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(),
+ * no ->drop_item() is provided.
+ */
+static struct configfs_group_operations group_children_group_ops = {
+        .make_group     = group_children_make_group,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type group_children_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &group_children_item_ops,
+        .ct_group_ops   = &group_children_group_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = group_children_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_subsystem group_children_subsys = {
+        .su_group = {
+                .cg_item = {
+                        .ci_namebuf = "03-group-children",
+                        .ci_type = &group_children_type,
+                },
+        },
+};
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * We're now done with our subsystem definitions.
+ * For convenience in this module, here's a list of them all.  It
+ * allows the init function to easily register them.  Most modules
+ * will only have one subsystem, and will only call register_subsystem
+ * on it directly.
+ */
+static struct configfs_subsystem *example_subsys[] = {
+        &childless_subsys.subsys,
+        &simple_children_subsys,
+        &group_children_subsys,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static int __init configfs_example_init(void)
+{
+        int ret;
+        int i;
+        struct configfs_subsystem *subsys;
+
+        for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) {
+                subsys = example_subsys[i];
+
+                config_group_init(&subsys->su_group);
+                mutex_init(&subsys->su_mutex);
+                ret = configfs_register_subsystem(subsys);
+                if (ret) {
+                        printk(KERN_ERR "Error %d while registering subsystem %s\n",
+                               ret,
+                               subsys->su_group.cg_item.ci_namebuf);
+                        goto out_unregister;
+                }
+        }
+
+        return 0;
+
+out_unregister:
+        for (; i >= 0; i--) {
+                configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]);
+        }
+
+        return ret;
+}
+
+static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void)
+{
+        int i;
+
+        for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) {
+                configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]);
+        }
+}
+
+module_init(configfs_example_init);
+module_exit(configfs_example_exit);
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1d0d41ff5c65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+Optimized MPEG Filesystem (OMFS)
+
+Overview
+========
+
+OMFS is a filesystem created by SonicBlue for use in the ReplayTV DVR
+and Rio Karma MP3 player.  The filesystem is extent-based, utilizing
+block sizes from 2k to 8k, with hash-based directories.  This
+filesystem driver may be used to read and write disks from these
+devices.
+
+Note, it is not recommended that this FS be used in place of a general
+filesystem for your own streaming media device.  Native Linux filesystems
+will likely perform better.
+
+More information is available at:
+
+    http://linux-karma.sf.net/
+
+Various utilities, including mkomfs and omfsck, are included with
+omfsprogs, available at:
+
+    http://bobcopeland.com/karma/
+
+Instructions are included in its README.
+
+Options
+=======
+
+OMFS supports the following mount-time options:
+
+    uid=n        - make all files owned by specified user
+    gid=n        - make all files owned by specified group
+    umask=xxx    - set permission umask to xxx
+    fmask=xxx    - set umask to xxx for files
+    dmask=xxx    - set umask to xxx for directories
+
+Disk format
+===========
+
+OMFS discriminates between "sysblocks" and normal data blocks.  The sysblock
+group consists of super block information, file metadata, directory structures,
+and extents.  Each sysblock has a header containing CRCs of the entire
+sysblock, and may be mirrored in successive blocks on the disk.  A sysblock may
+have a smaller size than a data block, but since they are both addressed by the
+same 64-bit block number, any remaining space in the smaller sysblock is
+unused.
+
+Sysblock header information:
+
+struct omfs_header {
+        __be64 h_self;                  /* FS block where this is located */
+        __be32 h_body_size;             /* size of useful data after header */
+        __be16 h_crc;                   /* crc-ccitt of body_size bytes */
+        char h_fill1[2];
+        u8 h_version;                   /* version, always 1 */
+        char h_type;                    /* OMFS_INODE_X */
+        u8 h_magic;                     /* OMFS_IMAGIC */
+        u8 h_check_xor;                 /* XOR of header bytes before this */
+        __be32 h_fill2;
+};
+
+Files and directories are both represented by omfs_inode:
+
+struct omfs_inode {
+        struct omfs_header i_head;      /* header */
+        __be64 i_parent;                /* parent containing this inode */
+        __be64 i_sibling;               /* next inode in hash bucket */
+        __be64 i_ctime;                 /* ctime, in milliseconds */
+        char i_fill1[35];
+        char i_type;                    /* OMFS_[DIR,FILE] */
+        __be32 i_fill2;
+        char i_fill3[64];
+        char i_name[OMFS_NAMELEN];      /* filename */
+        __be64 i_size;                  /* size of file, in bytes */
+};
+
+Directories in OMFS are implemented as a large hash table.  Filenames are
+hashed then prepended into the bucket list beginning at OMFS_DIR_START.
+Lookup requires hashing the filename, then seeking across i_sibling pointers
+until a match is found on i_name.  Empty buckets are represented by block
+pointers with all-1s (~0).
+
+A file is an omfs_inode structure followed by an extent table beginning at
+OMFS_EXTENT_START:
+
+struct omfs_extent_entry {
+        __be64 e_cluster;               /* start location of a set of blocks */
+        __be64 e_blocks;                /* number of blocks after e_cluster */
+};
+
+struct omfs_extent {
+        __be64 e_next;                  /* next extent table location */
+        __be32 e_extent_count;          /* total # extents in this table */
+        __be32 e_fill;
+        struct omfs_extent_entry e_entry;       /* start of extent entries */
+};
+
+Each extent holds the block offset followed by number of blocks allocated to
+the extent.  The final extent in each table is a terminator with e_cluster
+being ~0 and e_blocks being ones'-complement of the total number of blocks
+in the table.
+
+If this table overflows, a continuation inode is written and pointed to by
+e_next.  These have a header but lack the rest of the inode structure.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index 7f268f327d75..64557821ee59 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ Table 1-4: Kernel info in /proc
  uptime      System uptime                                     
  version     Kernel version                                    
  video       bttv info of video resources                       (2.4)
+ vmallocinfo Show vmalloced areas
 ..............................................................................
 
 You can,  for  example,  check  which interrupts are currently in use and what
@@ -557,6 +558,49 @@ VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area
  VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used
 VmallocChunk: largest contigious block of vmalloc area which is free
 
+..............................................................................
+
+vmallocinfo:
+
+Provides information about vmalloced/vmaped areas. One line per area,
+containing the virtual address range of the area, size in bytes,
+caller information of the creator, and optional information depending
+on the kind of area :
+
+ pages=nr    number of pages
+ phys=addr   if a physical address was specified
+ ioremap     I/O mapping (ioremap() and friends)
+ vmalloc     vmalloc() area
+ vmap        vmap()ed pages
+ user        VM_USERMAP area
+ vpages      buffer for pages pointers was vmalloced (huge area)
+ N<node>=nr  (Only on NUMA kernels)
+             Number of pages allocated on memory node <node>
+
+> cat /proc/vmallocinfo
+0xffffc20000000000-0xffffc20000201000 2101248 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
+  /0x2c0 pages=512 vmalloc N0=128 N1=128 N2=128 N3=128
+0xffffc20000201000-0xffffc20000302000 1052672 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
+  /0x2c0 pages=256 vmalloc N0=64 N1=64 N2=64 N3=64
+0xffffc20000302000-0xffffc20000304000    8192 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
+  phys=7fee8000 ioremap
+0xffffc20000304000-0xffffc20000307000   12288 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
+  phys=7fee7000 ioremap
+0xffffc2000031d000-0xffffc2000031f000    8192 init_vdso_vars+0x112/0x210
+0xffffc2000031f000-0xffffc2000032b000   49152 cramfs_uncompress_init+0x2e ...
+  /0x80 pages=11 vmalloc N0=3 N1=3 N2=2 N3=3
+0xffffc2000033a000-0xffffc2000033d000   12288 sys_swapon+0x640/0xac0      ...
+  pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
+0xffffc20000347000-0xffffc2000034c000   20480 xt_alloc_table_info+0xfe ...
+  /0x130 [x_tables] pages=4 vmalloc N0=4
+0xffffffffa0000000-0xffffffffa000f000   61440 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=14 vmalloc N2=14
+0xffffffffa000f000-0xffffffffa0014000   20480 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=4 vmalloc N1=4
+0xffffffffa0014000-0xffffffffa0017000   12288 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
+0xffffffffa0017000-0xffffffffa0022000   45056 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+   pages=10 vmalloc N0=10
 
 1.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide
 ----------------------------
@@ -887,7 +931,7 @@ group_prealloc  max_to_scan  mb_groups  mb_history  min_to_scan  order2_req
 stats  stream_req
 
 mb_groups:
-This file gives the details of mutiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
+This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
 
 mb_history:
 Multiblock allocation history.
@@ -1430,7 +1474,7 @@ used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2]
 normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0]
 (=0) is used.
 
-zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following exprssion.
+zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression.
 
 (i < j):
   zone[i]->protection[j]
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt
index a590c4093eff..5e8de25bf0f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt
@@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ Quota subsystem
 ===============
 
 Quota subsystem allows system administrator to set limits on used space and
-number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated
-with each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and
-number of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called
-softlimit and the second one hardlimit.  An user can never exceed a hardlimit
-for any resource. User is allowed to exceed softlimit but only for limited
-period of time. This period is called "grace period" or "grace time". When
-grace time is over, user is not able to allocate more space/inodes until he
-frees enough of them to get below softlimit.
+number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated with
+each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and number
+of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called softlimit
+and the second one hardlimit.  An user can never exceed a hardlimit for any
+resource (unless he has CAP_SYS_RESOURCE capability). User is allowed to exceed
+softlimit but only for limited period of time. This period is called "grace
+period" or "grace time". When grace time is over, user is not able to allocate
+more space/inodes until he frees enough of them to get below softlimit.
 
 Quota limits (and amount of grace time) are set independently for each
 filesystem.
@@ -53,6 +53,12 @@ in parentheses):
                 QUOTA_NL_BSOFTLONGWARN - space (block) softlimit is exceeded
                   longer than given grace period.
                 QUOTA_NL_BSOFTWARN - space (block) softlimit
+          - four warnings are also defined for the event when user stops
+            exceeding some limit:
+                QUOTA_NL_IHARDBELOW - inode hardlimit
+                QUOTA_NL_ISOFTBELOW - inode softlimit
+                QUOTA_NL_BHARDBELOW - space (block) hardlimit
+                QUOTA_NL_BSOFTBELOW - space (block) softlimit
         QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MAJOR (u32)
           - major number of a device with the affected filesystem
         QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MINOR (u32)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
index 094f2d2f38b1..510b722667ac 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
@@ -294,6 +294,16 @@ user-defined data with a channel, and is immediately available
 (including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or
 buf->chan->private_data.
 
+Buffer-only channels
+--------------------
+
+These channels have no files associated and can be created with
+relay_open(NULL, NULL, ...). Such channels are useful in scenarios such
+as when doing early tracing in the kernel, before the VFS is up. In these
+cases, one may open a buffer-only channel and then call
+relay_late_setup_files() when the kernel is ready to handle files,
+to expose the buffered data to the userspace.
+
 Channel 'modes'
 ---------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
index 7f27b8f840d0..9e9c348275a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
@@ -248,6 +248,7 @@ The top level sysfs directory looks like:
 block/
 bus/
 class/
+dev/
 devices/
 firmware/
 net/
@@ -274,6 +275,11 @@ fs/ contains a directory for some filesystems.  Currently each
 filesystem wanting to export attributes must create its own hierarchy
 below fs/ (see ./fuse.txt for an example).
 
+dev/ contains two directories char/ and block/. Inside these two
+directories there are symlinks named <major>:<minor>.  These symlinks
+point to the sysfs directory for the given device.  /sys/dev provides a
+quick way to lookup the sysfs interface for a device from the result of
+a stat(2) operation.
 
 More information can driver-model specific features can be found in
 Documentation/driver-model/. 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
index 540e9e7f59c5..6a0d70a22f05 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS supports on-the-flight compression which makes
 it possible to fit quite a lot of data to the flash.
 
 Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS is tolerant of unclean reboots and power-cuts.
-It does not need stuff like ckfs.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its
+It does not need stuff like fsck.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its
 journal and recovers from crashes, ensuring that the on-flash data
 structures are consistent.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
index 2d5e1e582e13..bbac4f1d9056 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
@@ -96,6 +96,14 @@ shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed
                         emulate the Windows 95 rule for create.
                  Default setting is `lower'.
 
+tz=UTC        -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time.
+                 This option disables the conversion of timestamps
+                 between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC
+                 (which Linux uses internally).  This is particuluarly
+                 useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras)
+                 that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of
+                 local time.
+
 <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false
 
 TODO
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
index b7522c6cbae3..c4d348dabe94 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ struct file_system_type {
 
 The get_sb() method has the following arguments:
 
-  struct file_system_type *fs_type: decribes the filesystem, partly initialized
+  struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized
         by the specific filesystem code
 
   int flags: mount flags
@@ -895,9 +895,9 @@ struct dentry_operations {
         iput() yourself
 
   d_dname: called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated.
-        Usefull for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay
+        Useful for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay
         pathname generation. (Instead of doing it when dentry is created,
-        its done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably
+        it's done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably
         dont want to use it, because their dentries are present in global
         dcache hash, so their hash should be an invariant. As no lock is
         held, d_dname() should not try to modify the dentry itself, unless
diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt
index f218f616ff6b..d330fe3103da 100644
--- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@
 Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc.
    Author:   Steven Rostedt <srostedt@redhat.com>
   License:   The GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+               (dual licensed under the GPL v2)
 Reviewers:   Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton,
              John Kacur, and David Teigland.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt
index c35ca9e40d4c..18022e249c53 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt
@@ -347,15 +347,12 @@ necessarily be nonportable.
 Dynamic definition of GPIOs is not currently standard; for example, as
 a side effect of configuring an add-on board with some GPIO expanders.
 
-These calls are purely for kernel space, but a userspace API could be built
-on top of them.
-
 
 GPIO implementor's framework (OPTIONAL)
 =======================================
 As noted earlier, there is an optional implementation framework making it
 easier for platforms to support different kinds of GPIO controller using
-the same programming interface.
+the same programming interface.  This framework is called "gpiolib".
 
 As a debugging aid, if debugfs is available a /sys/kernel/debug/gpio file
 will be found there.  That will list all the controllers registered through
@@ -392,11 +389,21 @@ either NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested.
 
 Platform Support
 ----------------
-To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select HAVE_GPIO_LIB"
+To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select" either
+ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
 and arrange that its <asm/gpio.h> includes <asm-generic/gpio.h> and defines
 three functions: gpio_get_value(), gpio_set_value(), and gpio_cansleep().
 They may also want to provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS.
 
+ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB means that the gpio-lib code will always get compiled
+into the kernel on that architecture.
+
+ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB means the gpio-lib code defaults to off and the user
+can enable it and build it into the kernel optionally.
+
+If neither of these options are selected, the platform does not support
+GPIOs through GPIO-lib and the code cannot be enabled by the user.
+
 Trivial implementations of those functions can directly use framework
 code, which always dispatches through the gpio_chip:
 
@@ -439,4 +446,120 @@ becomes available.  That may mean the device should not be registered until
 calls for that GPIO can work.  One way to address such dependencies is for
 such gpio_chip controllers to provide setup() and teardown() callbacks to
 board specific code; those board specific callbacks would register devices
-once all the necessary resources are available.
+once all the necessary resources are available, and remove them later when
+the GPIO controller device becomes unavailable.
+
+
+Sysfs Interface for Userspace (OPTIONAL)
+========================================
+Platforms which use the "gpiolib" implementors framework may choose to
+configure a sysfs user interface to GPIOs.  This is different from the
+debugfs interface, since it provides control over GPIO direction and
+value instead of just showing a gpio state summary.  Plus, it could be
+present on production systems without debugging support.
+
+Given approprate hardware documentation for the system, userspace could
+know for example that GPIO #23 controls the write protect line used to
+protect boot loader segments in flash memory.  System upgrade procedures
+may need to temporarily remove that protection, first importing a GPIO,
+then changing its output state, then updating the code before re-enabling
+the write protection.  In normal use, GPIO #23 would never be touched,
+and the kernel would have no need to know about it.
+
+Again depending on appropriate hardware documentation, on some systems
+userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that
+standard kernels won't know about.  And for some tasks, simple userspace
+GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs.
+
+Note that standard kernel drivers exist for common "LEDs and Buttons"
+GPIO tasks:  "leds-gpio" and "gpio_keys", respectively.  Use those
+instead of talking directly to the GPIOs; they integrate with kernel
+frameworks better than your userspace code could.
+
+
+Paths in Sysfs
+--------------
+There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio:
+
+   -    Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs;
+
+   -    GPIOs themselves; and
+
+   -    GPIO controllers ("gpio_chip" instances).
+
+That's in addition to standard files including the "device" symlink.
+
+The control interfaces are write-only:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/
+
+        "export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
+                a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file.
+
+                Example:  "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node
+                for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code.
+
+        "unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
+
+                Example:  "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19"
+                node exported using the "export" file.
+
+GPIO signals have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (for GPIO #42)
+and have the following read/write attributes:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/
+
+        "direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out".  This value may
+                normally be written.  Writing as "out" defaults to
+                initializing the value as low.  To ensure glitch free
+                operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to
+                configure the GPIO as an output with that initial value.
+
+                Note that this attribute *will not exist* if the kernel
+                doesn't support changing the direction of a GPIO, or
+                it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly
+                allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction.
+
+        "value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high).  If the GPIO
+                is configured as an output, this value may be written;
+                any nonzero value is treated as high.
+
+GPIO controllers have paths like /sys/class/gpio/chipchip42/ (for the
+controller implementing GPIOs starting at #42) and have the following
+read-only attributes:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/
+
+        "base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
+
+        "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
+
+        "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1)
+
+Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for
+what purposes.  However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on
+a daughtercard might be different depending on the base board being used,
+or other cards in the stack.  In such cases, you may need to use the
+gpiochip nodes (possibly in conjunction with schematics) to determine
+the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal.
+
+
+Exporting from Kernel code
+--------------------------
+Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been
+requested using gpio_request():
+
+        /* export the GPIO to userspace */
+        int gpio_export(unsigned gpio, bool direction_may_change);
+
+        /* reverse gpio_export() */
+        void gpio_unexport();
+
+After a kernel driver requests a GPIO, it may only be made available in
+the sysfs interface by gpio_export().  The driver can control whether the
+signal direction may change.  This helps drivers prevent userspace code
+from accidentally clobbering important system state.
+
+This explicit exporting can help with debugging (by making some kinds
+of experiments easier), or can provide an always-there interface that's
+suitable for documenting as part of a board support package.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
index 8f446070e64a..001d2e70bc11 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
@@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'sch311x'
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space
     Datasheet: http://www.nuhorizons.com/FeaturedProducts/Volume1/SMSC/311x.pdf
+  * SMSC SCH5027
+    Prefix: 'sch5027'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA
 
 Authors:
     Juerg Haefliger <juergh@gmail.com>
@@ -22,34 +26,36 @@ Module Parameters
                         and PWM output control functions. Using this parameter
                         shouldn't be required since the BIOS usually takes care
                         of this.
-
-Note that there is no need to use this parameter if the driver loads without
-complaining. The driver will say so if it is necessary.
+* probe_all_addr: bool  Include non-standard LPC addresses 0x162e and 0x164e
+                        when probing for ISA devices. This is required for the
+                        following boards:
+                        - VIA EPIA SN18000
 
 
 Description
 -----------
 
 This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the
-SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same) and SMSC SCH311x Super-I/O
-chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors temp[1-3] (2 remote
-diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and 1 internal) and up
-to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM
-outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and
+SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same), SMSC SCH5027, and SMSC
+SCH311x Super-I/O chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors
+temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and
+1 internal) and up to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement
+up to 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and
 automatically.
 
-For the DME1737 and A8000, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. Fan[3-6]
-and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on the
-configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are present
-during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly.
+For the DME1737, A8000 and SCH5027, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present.
+Fan[3-6] and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on
+the configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are
+present during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly.
 
 For the SCH311x, fan[1-3] and pwm[1-3] are always present and fan[4-6] and
 pwm[5-6] don't exist.
 
-The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737 and A8000 are only accessible
-via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. The driver
-will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects a DME1737
-or A8000 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x chip.
+The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737, A8000, and SCH5027 are only
+accessible via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus.
+The driver will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects
+a DME1737, A8000, or SCH5027 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x
+chip.
 
 
 Voltage Monitoring
@@ -60,6 +66,7 @@ scaling resistors. The values returned by the driver therefore reflect true
 millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows
 (the last column indicates the input ranges):
 
+DME1737, A8000:
         in0: +5VTR      (+5V standby)           0V - 6.64V
         in1: Vccp       (processor core)        0V - 3V
         in2: VCC        (internal +3.3V)        0V - 4.38V
@@ -68,6 +75,24 @@ millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows
         in5: VTR        (+3.3V standby)         0V - 4.38V
         in6: Vbat       (+3.0V)                 0V - 4.38V
 
+SCH311x:
+        in0: +2.5V                              0V - 6.64V
+        in1: Vccp       (processor core)        0V - 2V
+        in2: VCC        (internal +3.3V)        0V - 4.38V
+        in3: +5V                                0V - 6.64V
+        in4: +12V                               0V - 16V
+        in5: VTR        (+3.3V standby)         0V - 4.38V
+        in6: Vbat       (+3.0V)                 0V - 4.38V
+
+SCH5027:
+        in0: +5VTR      (+5V standby)           0V - 6.64V
+        in1: Vccp       (processor core)        0V - 3V
+        in2: VCC        (internal +3.3V)        0V - 4.38V
+        in3: V2_IN                              0V - 1.5V
+        in4: V1_IN                              0V - 1.5V
+        in5: VTR        (+3.3V standby)         0V - 4.38V
+        in6: Vbat       (+3.0V)                 0V - 4.38V
+
 Each voltage input has associated min and max limits which trigger an alarm
 when crossed.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
index 2fefaf582a43..e98bdfea3467 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
 Kernel driver ibmaem
 ======================
 
+This driver talks to the IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager, known
+henceforth as AEM.
+
 Supported systems:
-  * Any recent IBM System X server with Active Energy Manager support.
+  * Any recent IBM System X server with AEM support.
     This includes the x3350, x3550, x3650, x3655, x3755, x3850 M2,
     x3950 M2, and certain HS2x/LS2x/QS2x blades.  The IPMI host interface
     driver ("ipmi-si") needs to be loaded for this driver to do anything.
@@ -14,24 +17,22 @@ Author: Darrick J. Wong
 Description
 -----------
 
-This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power
-meters available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC.  All
-sensor banks will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk
-to both v1 and v2 interfaces.  This driver is completely separate from the
-older ibmpex driver.
+This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power meters
+available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC.  All sensor banks
+will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk to both v1 and v2
+interfaces.  This driver is completely separate from the older ibmpex driver.
 
-The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use.
-There is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption
-since the last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power
-use over a configurable interval.
+The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use.  There
+is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption since the
+last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power use over a
+configurable interval.
 
-The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present
-a wider range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as
-set by the AEM software, and temperature sensors.
+The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present a wider
+range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as set by the AEM
+software, and temperature sensors.
 
 Special Features
 ----------------
 
-The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by
-the Active Energy Manager software.  Setting the power cap from the host
-is not currently supported.
+The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by the AEM
+software.  Setting the power cap from the host is not currently supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index f4ce1fdbeff6..3496b7020e7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -6,12 +6,14 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'it87'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8705F_V.0.4.1.pdf
   * IT8712F
     Prefix: 'it8712'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.1.pdf
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/Errata%20V0.1%20for%20IT8712F%20V0.9.1.pdf
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.3.pdf
   * IT8716F/IT8726F
     Prefix: 'it8716'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
@@ -90,14 +92,13 @@ upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you
 can't have both on a given board.
 
 The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
-2 additional fans. They are supported by the driver for the IT8716F and
-IT8718F but not for the IT8712F
+2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver.
 
 The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional
 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan
 clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and
-revisions. For now, the driver only uses the 16-bit mode on the
-IT8716F and IT8718F.
+revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one
+of the above chips is detected.
 
 The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware
 for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
index 9549237530cf..6d41db7f17f8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
@@ -96,11 +96,6 @@ initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has
 confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the
 documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register.
 
-The ADT7463 has a THERM asserted counter. This counter has a 22.76ms
-resolution and a range of 5.8 seconds. The driver implements a 32-bit
-accumulator of the counter value to extend the range to over a year. The
-counter will stay at it's max value until read.
-
 See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note
 from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85.
 The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for
@@ -206,13 +201,15 @@ Configuration choices:
 
 The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration
 features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these,
-see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260.
+see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. These features
+are not currently supported by the lm85 driver.
 
 The Analog Devices ADM1027 has several vendor specific enhancements.
 The number of pulses-per-rev of the fans can be set, Tach monitoring
 can be optimized for PWM operation, and an offset can be applied to
 the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the
-measurements.
+measurements. These features are not currently supported by the lm85
+driver.
 
 In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control
 and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
index 880a59f53da9..6ee36dbafd64 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
@@ -40,10 +40,6 @@ Module Parameters
   (default is 1)
   Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
   Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
-* reset: int
-  (default is 0)
-  The driver used to reset the chip on load, but does no more. Use
-  'reset=1' to restore the old behavior. Report if you need to do this.
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
index f153b2f6d62c..a67d3b7a7098 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ Credits:
 
 Additional contributors:
     Sven Anders <anders@anduras.de>
+    Marc Hulsman <m.hulsman@tudelft.nl>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
@@ -67,9 +68,8 @@ on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
 
 Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
 triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
-readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8 for fan 1/2/3
-and 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for fan 4/5) to give the readings more
-range or accuracy.
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
+32, 64 or 128 for all fans) to give the readings more range or accuracy.
 
 Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
 An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9a45f9bb6a25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
@@ -0,0 +1,281 @@
+Upgrading I2C Drivers to the new 2.6 Driver Model
+=================================================
+
+Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+This guide outlines how to alter existing Linux 2.6 client drivers from
+the old to the new new binding methods.
+
+
+Example old-style driver
+------------------------
+
+
+struct example_state {
+        struct i2c_client       client;
+        ....
+};
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver;
+
+static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END };
+static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END };
+
+I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD;
+
+static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind)
+{
+        struct example_state *state;
+        struct device *dev = &adap->dev;  /* to use for dev_ reports */
+        int ret;
+
+        state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (state == NULL) {
+                dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n");
+                return -ENOMEM;
+        }
+
+        example->client.addr    = addr;
+        example->client.flags   = 0;
+        example->client.adapter = adap;
+
+        i2c_set_clientdata(&state->i2c_client, state);
+        strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE);
+
+        ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client);
+        if (ret < 0) {
+                dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n");
+                kfree(state);
+                return ret;
+        }
+
+        dev = &state->i2c_client.dev;
+
+        /* rest of the initialisation goes here. */
+
+        dev_info(dev, "example client created\n");
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
+{
+        struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+        i2c_detach_client(client);
+        kfree(state);
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap)
+{
+        return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach);
+}
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+        .driver         = {
+                .owner          = THIS_MODULE,
+                .name           = "example",
+        },
+        .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter,
+        .detach_client  = __devexit_p(example_detach),
+        .suspend        = example_suspend,
+        .resume         = example_resume,
+};
+
+
+Updating the client
+-------------------
+
+The new style binding model will check against a list of supported
+devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering
+the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and
+.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data,
+as follows:
+
+- static struct i2c_driver example_driver;
+
+- static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END };
+- static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END };
+
+- I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD;
+
+- static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap)
+- {
+-       return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach);
+- }
+
+ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+-       .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter,
+-       .detach_client  = __devexit_p(example_detach),
+ }
+
+Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so:
+
+ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
++       .probe          = example_probe,
++       .remove         = __devexit_p(example_remove),
+ }
+
+Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters
+which include the i2c_client that it will be working with:
+
+- static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind)
++ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
++                          const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+
+Change the name of example_attach to example_probe to align it with the
+i2c_driver entry names. The rest of the probe routine will now need to be
+changed as the i2c_client has already been setup for use.
+
+The necessary client fields have already been setup before
+the probe function is called, so the following client setup
+can be removed:
+
+-       example->client.addr    = addr;
+-       example->client.flags   = 0;
+-       example->client.adapter = adap;
+-
+-       strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE);
+
+The i2c_set_clientdata is now:
+
+-       i2c_set_clientdata(&state->client, state);
++       i2c_set_clientdata(client, state);
+
+The call to i2c_attach_client is no longer needed, if the probe
+routine exits successfully, then the driver will be automatically
+attached by the core. Change the probe routine as so:
+
+-       ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client);
+-       if (ret < 0) {
+-               dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n");
+-               kfree(state);
+-               return ret;
+-       }
+
+
+Remove the storage of 'struct i2c_client' from the 'struct example_state'
+as we are provided with the i2c_client in our example_probe. Instead we
+store a pointer to it for when it is needed.
+
+struct example_state {
+-       struct i2c_client       client;
++       struct i2c_client       *client;
+
+the new i2c client as so:
+
+-       struct device *dev = &adap->dev;  /* to use for dev_ reports */
++       struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev;  /* to use for dev_ reports */
+
+And remove the change after our client is attached, as the driver no
+longer needs to register a new client structure with the core:
+
+-       dev = &state->i2c_client.dev;
+
+In the probe routine, ensure that the new state has the client stored
+in it:
+
+static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *i2c_client,
+                         const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+{
+        struct example_state *state;
+        struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev;
+        int ret;
+
+        state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (state == NULL) {
+                dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n");
+                return -ENOMEM;
+        }
+
++       state->client = i2c_client;
+
+Update the detach method, by changing the name to _remove and
+to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you
+can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for
+any of the core functions.
+
+- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
++ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
+{
+        struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+-       i2c_detach_client(client);
+
+And finally ensure that we have the correct ID table for the i2c-core
+and other utilities:
+
++ struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = {
++       { "example", 0 },
++       { }
++};
++
++MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable);
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+        .driver         = {
+                .owner          = THIS_MODULE,
+                .name           = "example",
+        },
++       .id_table       = example_ids,
+
+
+Our driver should now look like this:
+
+struct example_state {
+        struct i2c_client       *client;
+        ....
+};
+
+static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
+                         const struct i2c_device_id *id)
+{
+        struct example_state *state;
+        struct device *dev = &client->dev;
+
+        state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (state == NULL) {
+                dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n");
+                return -ENOMEM;
+        }
+
+        state->client = client;
+        i2c_set_clientdata(client, state);
+
+        /* rest of the initialisation goes here. */
+
+        dev_info(dev, "example client created\n");
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
+{
+        struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+        kfree(state);
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = {
+        { "example", 0 },
+        { }
+};
+
+MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable);
+
+static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
+        .driver         = {
+                .owner          = THIS_MODULE,
+                .name           = "example",
+        },
+        .id_table       = example_idtable,
+        .probe          = example_probe,
+        .remove         = __devexit_p(example_remove),
+        .suspend        = example_suspend,
+        .resume         = example_resume,
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/Makefile b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b75db69ec483
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := aliasing-test
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
index bec9d815da33..914d07f49268 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ Note: For step 2, please make sure that host page size == TARGET_PAGE_SIZE of qe
                 /usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image
                 (xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4)
 
-5. Known possibile issue on some platforms with old Firmware.
+5. Known possible issue on some platforms with old Firmware.
 
-If meet strange host crashe issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways:
+In the event of strange host crash issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways:
 
 (1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one.
 
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ index 0b53344..f02b0f7 100644
         mov ar.pfs = loc1
         mov rp = loc0
         ;;
--       srlz.d                          // seralize restoration of psr.l
-+       srlz.i                  // seralize restoration of psr.l
+-       srlz.d                          // serialize restoration of psr.l
++       srlz.i                  // serialize restoration of psr.l
 +       ;;
         br.ret.sptk.many b0
  END(ia64_pal_call_static)
diff --git a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt
index afe0d6543e09..202e9dbacec3 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The driver works with ALSA drivers simultaneously. For example, the xracer
 uses joystick as input device and PCM device as sound output in one time.
 There are no sound or input collisions detected. The source code have
 comments about them; but I've found the joystick can be initialized 
-separately of ALSA modules. So, you canm use only one joystick driver
+separately of ALSA modules. So, you can use only one joystick driver
 without ALSA drivers. The ALSA drivers are not needed to compile or
 run this driver.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
index 3bb5f466a90d..1c6b545635a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
@@ -105,7 +105,6 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 'T'     all     linux/soundcard.h       conflict!
 'T'     all     asm-i386/ioctls.h       conflict!
 'U'     00-EF   linux/drivers/usb/usb.h
-'U'     F0-FF   drivers/usb/auerswald.c
 'V'     all     linux/vt.h
 'W'     00-1F   linux/watchdog.h        conflict!
 'W'     00-1F   linux/wanrouter.h       conflict!
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt
index bfdf7f3ee4f0..e35efb0cec2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 To decode a hex IOCTL code:
 
-Most architecures use this generic format, but check
+Most architectures use this generic format, but check
 include/ARCH/ioctl.h for specifics, e.g. powerpc
 uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size.
 
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size.
  7-0    function #
 
 
- So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218,
+So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218,
 character 'r' function 1. Grepping the source reveals this is:
 
 #define VFAT_IOCTL_READDIR_BOTH         _IOR('r', 1, struct dirent [2])
diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt
index 5925c3cd030d..59a69ec67c40 100644
--- a/Documentation/iostats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ disk and partition statistics are consistent again. Since we still don't
 keep record of the partition-relative address, an operation is attributed to
 the partition which contains the first sector of the request after the
 eventual merges. As requests can be merged across partition, this could lead
-to some (probably insignificant) innacuracy.
+to some (probably insignificant) inaccuracy.
 
 Additional notes
 ----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cd8bf920e77b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+mISDN is a new modular ISDN driver, in the long term it should replace
+the old I4L driver architecture for passiv ISDN cards.
+It was designed to allow a broad range of applications and interfaces
+but only have the basic function in kernel, the interface to the user
+space is based on sockets with a own address family AF_ISDN.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
index 9691c7f5166c..0705040531a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
@@ -65,26 +65,26 @@ Install kexec-tools
 
 2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL:
 
-http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz
+http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools.tar.gz
 
-This is a symlink to the latest version, which at the time of writing is
-20061214, the only release of kexec-tools-testing so far. As other versions
-are released, the older ones will remain available at
-http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/
+This is a symlink to the latest version.
 
-Note: Latest kexec-tools-testing git tree is available at
+The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at:
 
-git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git
+git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git
 or
-http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git;a=summary
+http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git
+
+More information about kexec-tools can be found at
+http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/README.html
 
 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows:
 
-   tar xvpzf kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz
+   tar xvpzf kexec-tools.tar.gz
 
 4) Change to the kexec-tools directory, as follows:
 
-   cd kexec-tools-testing-VERSION
+   cd kexec-tools-VERSION
 
 5) Configure the package, as follows:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 30d44b78171a..a8976467a983 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -87,7 +87,8 @@ parameter is applicable:
         SH      SuperH architecture is enabled.
         SMP     The kernel is an SMP kernel.
         SPARC   Sparc architecture is enabled.
-        SWSUSP  Software suspend is enabled.
+        SWSUSP  Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
+        SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled.
         TS      Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
         USB     USB support is enabled.
         USBHID  USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
@@ -147,10 +148,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         default: 0
 
         acpi_sleep=     [HW,ACPI] Sleep options
-                        Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, old_ordering }
+                        Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, old_ordering }
                         See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode.
                         s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep
                         as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called.
+                        s4_nohwsig prevents ACPI hardware signature from being
+                        used during resume from hibernation.
                         old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS
                         control method, wrt putting devices into low power
                         states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is
@@ -362,6 +365,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         no delay (0).
                         Format: integer
 
+        bootmem_debug   [KNL] Enable bootmem allocator debug messages.
+
         bttv.card=      [HW,V4L] bttv (bt848 + bt878 based grabber cards)
         bttv.radio=     Most important insmod options are available as
                         kernel args too.
@@ -774,8 +779,22 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
         hisax=          [HW,ISDN]
                         See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax.
 
-        hugepages=      [HW,X86-32,IA-64] Maximal number of HugeTLB pages.
-        hugepagesz=     [HW,IA-64,PPC] The size of the HugeTLB pages.
+        hugepages=      [HW,X86-32,IA-64] HugeTLB pages to allocate at boot.
+        hugepagesz=     [HW,IA-64,PPC,X86-64] The size of the HugeTLB pages.
+                        On x86-64 and powerpc, this option can be specified
+                        multiple times interleaved with hugepages= to reserve
+                        huge pages of different sizes. Valid pages sizes on
+                        x86-64 are 2M (when the CPU supports "pse") and 1G
+                        (when the CPU supports the "pdpe1gb" cpuinfo flag)
+                        Note that 1GB pages can only be allocated at boot time
+                        using hugepages= and not freed afterwards.
+        default_hugepagesz=
+                        [same as hugepagesz=] The size of the default
+                        HugeTLB page size. This is the size represented by
+                        the legacy /proc/ hugepages APIs, used for SHM, and
+                        default size when mounting hugetlbfs filesystems.
+                        Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size
+                        if not specified.
 
         i8042.direct    [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
         i8042.dumbkbd   [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from
@@ -1225,6 +1244,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         mga=            [HW,DRM]
 
+        mminit_loglevel=
+                        [KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this
+                        parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for
+                        the additional memory initialisation checks. A value
+                        of 0 disables mminit logging and a level of 4 will
+                        log everything. Information is printed at KERN_DEBUG
+                        so loglevel=8 may also need to be specified.
+
         mousedev.tap_time=
                         [MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and
                         leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered
@@ -2034,6 +2061,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         snd-ymfpci=     [HW,ALSA]
 
+        softlockup_panic=
+                        [KNL] Should the soft-lockup detector generate panics.
+
         sonypi.*=       [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver
                         See Documentation/sonypi.txt
 
@@ -2098,6 +2128,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         tdfx=           [HW,DRM]
 
+        test_suspend=   [SUSPEND]
+                        Specify "mem" (for Suspend-to-RAM) or "standby" (for
+                        standby suspend) as the system sleep state to briefly
+                        enter during system startup.  The system is woken from
+                        this state using a wakeup-capable RTC alarm.
+
         thash_entries=  [KNL,NET]
                         Set number of hash buckets for TCP connection
 
@@ -2125,13 +2161,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency
                         0: no polling (default)
 
-        tipar.timeout=  [HW,PPT]
-                        Set communications timeout in tenths of a second
-                        (default 15).
-
-        tipar.delay=    [HW,PPT]
-                        Set inter-bit delay in microseconds (default 10).
-
         tmscsim=        [HW,SCSI]
                         See comment before function dc390_setup() in
                         drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c.
diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt
index d5c7a57d1700..b56aacc1fff8 100644
--- a/Documentation/keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/keys.txt
@@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ payload contents" for more information.
     request_key_with_auxdata() respectively.
 
     These two functions return with the key potentially still under
-    construction.  To wait for contruction completion, the following should be
+    construction.  To wait for construction completion, the following should be
     called:
 
         int wait_for_key_construction(struct key *key, bool intr);
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 64b3f146e4b0..02dc748b76c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
                      ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
 
-                            Version 0.20
-                          April 09th, 2008
+                            Version 0.21
+                           May 29th, 2008
 
                Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
              Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
@@ -621,7 +621,8 @@ Bluetooth
 ---------
 
 procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
-sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable
+sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable (deprecated)
+sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw"
 
 This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad
 Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot.
@@ -643,8 +644,12 @@ Sysfs notes:
                 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
                 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
 
-        Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the
-        generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet.
+        Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
+        class.  It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
+        2010.
+
+        rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw": refer to
+        Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
 
 Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
 --------------------------------------------
@@ -1374,7 +1379,8 @@ EXPERIMENTAL: WAN
 -----------------
 
 procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
-sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable
+sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated)
+sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw"
 
 This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
 directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
@@ -1404,8 +1410,12 @@ Sysfs notes:
                 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
                 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
 
-        Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the
-        generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet.
+        Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
+        class.  It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
+        2010.
+
+        rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw": refer to
+        Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
 
 Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
 ------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds-class.txt
index 18860ad9935a..6399557cdab3 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds-class.txt
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs
 
 Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To
 support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the
-blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemeted, triggers can
+blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can
 attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set()
 function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL
 otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software.
diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
index 82fafe0429fe..655414821edc 100644
--- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
+++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
@@ -36,11 +36,13 @@
 #include <sched.h>
 #include <limits.h>
 #include <stddef.h>
+#include <signal.h>
 #include "linux/lguest_launcher.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_config.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_net.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_blk.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_console.h"
+#include "linux/virtio_rng.h"
 #include "linux/virtio_ring.h"
 #include "asm-x86/bootparam.h"
 /*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do
@@ -64,8 +66,8 @@ typedef uint8_t u8;
 #endif
 /* We can have up to 256 pages for devices. */
 #define DEVICE_PAGES 256
-/* This will occupy 2 pages: it must be a power of 2. */
-#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 128
+/* This will occupy 3 pages: it must be a power of 2. */
+#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 256
 
 /*L:120 verbose is both a global flag and a macro.  The C preprocessor allows
  * this, and although I wouldn't recommend it, it works quite nicely here. */
@@ -74,12 +76,19 @@ static bool verbose;
         do { if (verbose) printf(args); } while(0)
 /*:*/
 
-/* The pipe to send commands to the waker process */
-static int waker_fd;
+/* File descriptors for the Waker. */
+struct {
+        int pipe[2];
+        int lguest_fd;
+} waker_fds;
+
 /* The pointer to the start of guest memory. */
 static void *guest_base;
 /* The maximum guest physical address allowed, and maximum possible. */
 static unsigned long guest_limit, guest_max;
+/* The pipe for signal hander to write to. */
+static int timeoutpipe[2];
+static unsigned int timeout_usec = 500;
 
 /* a per-cpu variable indicating whose vcpu is currently running */
 static unsigned int __thread cpu_id;
@@ -155,11 +164,14 @@ struct virtqueue
         /* Last available index we saw. */
         u16 last_avail_idx;
 
-        /* The routine to call when the Guest pings us. */
-        void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me);
+        /* The routine to call when the Guest pings us, or timeout. */
+        void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me, bool timeout);
 
         /* Outstanding buffers */
         unsigned int inflight;
+
+        /* Is this blocked awaiting a timer? */
+        bool blocked;
 };
 
 /* Remember the arguments to the program so we can "reboot" */
@@ -190,6 +202,9 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align,
         return iov->iov_base;
 }
 
+/* Wrapper for the last available index.  Makes it easier to change. */
+#define lg_last_avail(vq)       ((vq)->last_avail_idx)
+
 /* The virtio configuration space is defined to be little-endian.  x86 is
  * little-endian too, but it's nice to be explicit so we have these helpers. */
 #define cpu_to_le16(v16) (v16)
@@ -199,6 +214,33 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align,
 #define le32_to_cpu(v32) (v32)
 #define le64_to_cpu(v64) (v64)
 
+/* Is this iovec empty? */
+static bool iov_empty(const struct iovec iov[], unsigned int num_iov)
+{
+        unsigned int i;
+
+        for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++)
+                if (iov[i].iov_len)
+                        return false;
+        return true;
+}
+
+/* Take len bytes from the front of this iovec. */
+static void iov_consume(struct iovec iov[], unsigned num_iov, unsigned len)
+{
+        unsigned int i;
+
+        for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++) {
+                unsigned int used;
+
+                used = iov[i].iov_len < len ? iov[i].iov_len : len;
+                iov[i].iov_base += used;
+                iov[i].iov_len -= used;
+                len -= used;
+        }
+        assert(len == 0);
+}
+
 /* The device virtqueue descriptors are followed by feature bitmasks. */
 static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev)
 {
@@ -254,6 +296,7 @@ static void *map_zeroed_pages(unsigned int num)
                     PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0);
         if (addr == MAP_FAILED)
                 err(1, "Mmaping %u pages of /dev/zero", num);
+        close(fd);
 
         return addr;
 }
@@ -540,69 +583,64 @@ static void add_device_fd(int fd)
  * watch, but handing a file descriptor mask through to the kernel is fairly
  * icky.
  *
- * Instead, we fork off a process which watches the file descriptors and writes
+ * Instead, we clone off a thread which watches the file descriptors and writes
  * the LHREQ_BREAK command to the /dev/lguest file descriptor to tell the Host
  * stop running the Guest.  This causes the Launcher to return from the
  * /dev/lguest read with -EAGAIN, where it will write to /dev/lguest to reset
  * the LHREQ_BREAK and wake us up again.
  *
  * This, of course, is merely a different *kind* of icky.
+ *
+ * Given my well-known antipathy to threads, I'd prefer to use processes.  But
+ * it's easier to share Guest memory with threads, and trivial to share the
+ * devices.infds as the Launcher changes it.
  */
-static void wake_parent(int pipefd, int lguest_fd)
+static int waker(void *unused)
 {
-        /* Add the pipe from the Launcher to the fdset in the device_list, so
-         * we watch it, too. */
-        add_device_fd(pipefd);
+        /* Close the write end of the pipe: only the Launcher has it open. */
+        close(waker_fds.pipe[1]);
 
         for (;;) {
                 fd_set rfds = devices.infds;
                 unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 1 };
+                unsigned int maxfd = devices.max_infd;
+
+                /* We also listen to the pipe from the Launcher. */
+                FD_SET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds);
+                if (waker_fds.pipe[0] > maxfd)
+                        maxfd = waker_fds.pipe[0];
 
                 /* Wait until input is ready from one of the devices. */
-                select(devices.max_infd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL);
-                /* Is it a message from the Launcher? */
-                if (FD_ISSET(pipefd, &rfds)) {
-                        int fd;
-                        /* If read() returns 0, it means the Launcher has
-                         * exited.  We silently follow. */
-                        if (read(pipefd, &fd, sizeof(fd)) == 0)
-                                exit(0);
-                        /* Otherwise it's telling us to change what file
-                         * descriptors we're to listen to.  Positive means
-                         * listen to a new one, negative means stop
-                         * listening. */
-                        if (fd >= 0)
-                                FD_SET(fd, &devices.infds);
-                        else
-                                FD_CLR(-fd - 1, &devices.infds);
-                } else /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command. */
-                        pwrite(lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id);
+                select(maxfd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+
+                /* Message from Launcher? */
+                if (FD_ISSET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds)) {
+                        char c;
+                        /* If this fails, then assume Launcher has exited.
+                         * Don't do anything on exit: we're just a thread! */
+                        if (read(waker_fds.pipe[0], &c, 1) != 1)
+                                _exit(0);
+                        continue;
+                }
+
+                /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command to snap the Launcher out of it. */
+                pwrite(waker_fds.lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id);
         }
+        return 0;
 }
 
 /* This routine just sets up a pipe to the Waker process. */
-static int setup_waker(int lguest_fd)
-{
-        int pipefd[2], child;
-
-        /* We create a pipe to talk to the Waker, and also so it knows when the
-         * Launcher dies (and closes pipe). */
-        pipe(pipefd);
-        child = fork();
-        if (child == -1)
-                err(1, "forking");
-
-        if (child == 0) {
-                /* We are the Waker: close the "writing" end of our copy of the
-                 * pipe and start waiting for input. */
-                close(pipefd[1]);
-                wake_parent(pipefd[0], lguest_fd);
-        }
-        /* Close the reading end of our copy of the pipe. */
-        close(pipefd[0]);
+static void setup_waker(int lguest_fd)
+{
+        /* This pipe is closed when Launcher dies, telling Waker. */
+        if (pipe(waker_fds.pipe) != 0)
+                err(1, "Creating pipe for Waker");
+
+        /* Waker also needs to know the lguest fd */
+        waker_fds.lguest_fd = lguest_fd;
 
-        /* Here is the fd used to talk to the waker. */
-        return pipefd[1];
+        if (clone(waker, malloc(4096) + 4096, CLONE_VM | SIGCHLD, NULL) == -1)
+                err(1, "Creating Waker");
 }
 
 /*
@@ -661,19 +699,22 @@ static unsigned get_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq,
                             unsigned int *out_num, unsigned int *in_num)
 {
         unsigned int i, head;
+        u16 last_avail;
 
         /* Check it isn't doing very strange things with descriptor numbers. */
-        if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - vq->last_avail_idx) > vq->vring.num)
+        last_avail = lg_last_avail(vq);
+        if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - last_avail) > vq->vring.num)
                 errx(1, "Guest moved used index from %u to %u",
-                     vq->last_avail_idx, vq->vring.avail->idx);
+                     last_avail, vq->vring.avail->idx);
 
         /* If there's nothing new since last we looked, return invalid. */
-        if (vq->vring.avail->idx == vq->last_avail_idx)
+        if (vq->vring.avail->idx == last_avail)
                 return vq->vring.num;
 
         /* Grab the next descriptor number they're advertising, and increment
          * the index we've seen. */
-        head = vq->vring.avail->ring[vq->last_avail_idx++ % vq->vring.num];
+        head = vq->vring.avail->ring[last_avail % vq->vring.num];
+        lg_last_avail(vq)++;
 
         /* If their number is silly, that's a fatal mistake. */
         if (head >= vq->vring.num)
@@ -821,8 +862,8 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
                                 unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 0 };
                                 /* Close the fd so Waker will know it has to
                                  * exit. */
-                                close(waker_fd);
-                                /* Just in case waker is blocked in BREAK, send
+                                close(waker_fds.pipe[1]);
+                                /* Just in case Waker is blocked in BREAK, send
                                  * unbreak now. */
                                 write(fd, args, sizeof(args));
                                 exit(2);
@@ -839,7 +880,7 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 
 /* Handling output for console is simple: we just get all the output buffers
  * and write them to stdout. */
-static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
         unsigned int head, out, in;
         int len;
@@ -854,6 +895,21 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
         }
 }
 
+static void block_vq(struct virtqueue *vq)
+{
+        struct itimerval itm;
+
+        vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+        vq->blocked = true;
+
+        itm.it_interval.tv_sec = 0;
+        itm.it_interval.tv_usec = 0;
+        itm.it_value.tv_sec = 0;
+        itm.it_value.tv_usec = timeout_usec;
+
+        setitimer(ITIMER_REAL, &itm, NULL);
+}
+
 /*
  * The Network
  *
@@ -861,22 +917,34 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
  * and write them (ignoring the first element) to this device's file descriptor
  * (/dev/net/tun).
  */
-static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
-        unsigned int head, out, in;
+        unsigned int head, out, in, num = 0;
         int len;
         struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num];
+        static int last_timeout_num;
 
         /* Keep getting output buffers from the Guest until we run out. */
         while ((head = get_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in)) != vq->vring.num) {
                 if (in)
                         errx(1, "Input buffers in output queue?");
-                /* Check header, but otherwise ignore it (we told the Guest we
-                 * supported no features, so it shouldn't have anything
-                 * interesting). */
-                (void)convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr);
-                len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov+1, out-1);
+                len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov, out);
+                if (len < 0)
+                        err(1, "Writing network packet to tun");
                 add_used_and_trigger(fd, vq, head, len);
+                num++;
+        }
+
+        /* Block further kicks and set up a timer if we saw anything. */
+        if (!timeout && num)
+                block_vq(vq);
+
+        if (timeout) {
+                if (num < last_timeout_num)
+                        timeout_usec += 10;
+                else if (timeout_usec > 1)
+                        timeout_usec--;
+                last_timeout_num = num;
         }
 }
 
@@ -887,7 +955,6 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
         unsigned int head, in_num, out_num;
         int len;
         struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num];
-        struct virtio_net_hdr *hdr;
 
         /* First we need a network buffer from the Guests's recv virtqueue. */
         head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num);
@@ -896,25 +963,23 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
                  * early, the Guest won't be ready yet.  Wait until the device
                  * status says it's ready. */
                 /* FIXME: Actually want DRIVER_ACTIVE here. */
-                if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)
-                        warn("network: no dma buffer!");
+
+                /* Now tell it we want to know if new things appear. */
+                dev->vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+                wmb();
+
                 /* We'll turn this back on if input buffers are registered. */
                 return false;
         } else if (out_num)
                 errx(1, "Output buffers in network recv queue?");
 
-        /* First element is the header: we set it to 0 (no features). */
-        hdr = convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr);
-        hdr->flags = 0;
-        hdr->gso_type = VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE;
-
         /* Read the packet from the device directly into the Guest's buffer. */
-        len = readv(dev->fd, iov+1, in_num-1);
+        len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num);
         if (len <= 0)
                 err(1, "reading network");
 
         /* Tell the Guest about the new packet. */
-        add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, sizeof(*hdr) + len);
+        add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, len);
 
         verbose("tun input packet len %i [%02x %02x] (%s)\n", len,
                 ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[0], ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[1],
@@ -927,11 +992,18 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
 /*L:215 This is the callback attached to the network and console input
  * virtqueues: it ensures we try again, in case we stopped console or net
  * delivery because Guest didn't have any buffers. */
-static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
         add_device_fd(vq->dev->fd);
-        /* Tell waker to listen to it again */
-        write(waker_fd, &vq->dev->fd, sizeof(vq->dev->fd));
+        /* Snap the Waker out of its select loop. */
+        write(waker_fds.pipe[1], "", 1);
+}
+
+static void net_enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
+{
+        /* We don't need to know again when Guest refills receive buffer. */
+        vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+        enable_fd(fd, vq, timeout);
 }
 
 /* When the Guest tells us they updated the status field, we handle it. */
@@ -951,7 +1023,7 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev)
                 for (vq = dev->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) {
                         memset(vq->vring.desc, 0,
                                vring_size(vq->config.num, getpagesize()));
-                        vq->last_avail_idx = 0;
+                        lg_last_avail(vq) = 0;
                 }
         } else if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_FAILED) {
                 warnx("Device %s configuration FAILED", dev->name);
@@ -960,10 +1032,10 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev)
 
                 verbose("Device %s OK: offered", dev->name);
                 for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++)
-                        verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]);
+                        verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]);
                 verbose(", accepted");
                 for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++)
-                        verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev)
+                        verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev)
                                 [dev->desc->feature_len+i]);
 
                 if (dev->ready)
@@ -1000,7 +1072,7 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr)
                         if (strcmp(vq->dev->name, "console") != 0)
                                 verbose("Output to %s\n", vq->dev->name);
                         if (vq->handle_output)
-                                vq->handle_output(fd, vq);
+                                vq->handle_output(fd, vq, false);
                         return;
                 }
         }
@@ -1014,6 +1086,29 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr)
               strnlen(from_guest_phys(addr), guest_limit - addr));
 }
 
+static void handle_timeout(int fd)
+{
+        char buf[32];
+        struct device *i;
+        struct virtqueue *vq;
+
+        /* Clear the pipe */
+        read(timeoutpipe[0], buf, sizeof(buf));
+
+        /* Check each device and virtqueue: flush blocked ones. */
+        for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) {
+                for (vq = i->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) {
+                        if (!vq->blocked)
+                                continue;
+
+                        vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY;
+                        vq->blocked = false;
+                        if (vq->handle_output)
+                                vq->handle_output(fd, vq, true);
+                }
+        }
+}
+
 /* This is called when the Waker wakes us up: check for incoming file
  * descriptors. */
 static void handle_input(int fd)
@@ -1024,16 +1119,20 @@ static void handle_input(int fd)
         for (;;) {
                 struct device *i;
                 fd_set fds = devices.infds;
+                int num;
 
+                num = select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll);
+                /* Could get interrupted */
+                if (num < 0)
+                        continue;
                 /* If nothing is ready, we're done. */
-                if (select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll) == 0)
+                if (num == 0)
                         break;
 
                 /* Otherwise, call the device(s) which have readable file
                  * descriptors and a method of handling them.  */
                 for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) {
                         if (i->handle_input && FD_ISSET(i->fd, &fds)) {
-                                int dev_fd;
                                 if (i->handle_input(fd, i))
                                         continue;
 
@@ -1043,13 +1142,12 @@ static void handle_input(int fd)
                                  * buffers to deliver into.  Console also uses
                                  * it when it discovers that stdin is closed. */
                                 FD_CLR(i->fd, &devices.infds);
-                                /* Tell waker to ignore it too, by sending a
-                                 * negative fd number (-1, since 0 is a valid
-                                 * FD number). */
-                                dev_fd = -i->fd - 1;
-                                write(waker_fd, &dev_fd, sizeof(dev_fd));
                         }
                 }
+
+                /* Is this the timeout fd? */
+                if (FD_ISSET(timeoutpipe[0], &fds))
+                        handle_timeout(fd);
         }
 }
 
@@ -1098,7 +1196,7 @@ static struct lguest_device_desc *new_dev_desc(u16 type)
 /* Each device descriptor is followed by the description of its virtqueues.  We
  * specify how many descriptors the virtqueue is to have. */
 static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs,
-                          void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me))
+                          void (*handle_output)(int, struct virtqueue *, bool))
 {
         unsigned int pages;
         struct virtqueue **i, *vq = malloc(sizeof(*vq));
@@ -1114,6 +1212,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs,
         vq->last_avail_idx = 0;
         vq->dev = dev;
         vq->inflight = 0;
+        vq->blocked = false;
 
         /* Initialize the configuration. */
         vq->config.num = num_descs;
@@ -1246,6 +1345,24 @@ static void setup_console(void)
 }
 /*:*/
 
+static void timeout_alarm(int sig)
+{
+        write(timeoutpipe[1], "", 1);
+}
+
+static void setup_timeout(void)
+{
+        if (pipe(timeoutpipe) != 0)
+                err(1, "Creating timeout pipe");
+
+        if (fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_SETFL,
+                  fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_GETFL) | O_NONBLOCK) != 0)
+                err(1, "Making timeout pipe nonblocking");
+
+        add_device_fd(timeoutpipe[0]);
+        signal(SIGALRM, timeout_alarm);
+}
+
 /*M:010 Inter-guest networking is an interesting area.  Simplest is to have a
  * --sharenet=<name> option which opens or creates a named pipe.  This can be
  * used to send packets to another guest in a 1:1 manner.
@@ -1264,10 +1381,25 @@ static void setup_console(void)
 
 static u32 str2ip(const char *ipaddr)
 {
-        unsigned int byte[4];
+        unsigned int b[4];
 
-        sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &byte[0], &byte[1], &byte[2], &byte[3]);
-        return (byte[0] << 24) | (byte[1] << 16) | (byte[2] << 8) | byte[3];
+        if (sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &b[0], &b[1], &b[2], &b[3]) != 4)
+                errx(1, "Failed to parse IP address '%s'", ipaddr);
+        return (b[0] << 24) | (b[1] << 16) | (b[2] << 8) | b[3];
+}
+
+static void str2mac(const char *macaddr, unsigned char mac[6])
+{
+        unsigned int m[6];
+        if (sscanf(macaddr, "%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x",
+                   &m[0], &m[1], &m[2], &m[3], &m[4], &m[5]) != 6)
+                errx(1, "Failed to parse mac address '%s'", macaddr);
+        mac[0] = m[0];
+        mac[1] = m[1];
+        mac[2] = m[2];
+        mac[3] = m[3];
+        mac[4] = m[4];
+        mac[5] = m[5];
 }
 
 /* This code is "adapted" from libbridge: it attaches the Host end of the
@@ -1288,6 +1420,7 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name)
                 errx(1, "interface %s does not exist!", if_name);
 
         strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, br_name, IFNAMSIZ);
+        ifr.ifr_name[IFNAMSIZ-1] = '\0';
         ifr.ifr_ifindex = ifidx;
         if (ioctl(fd, SIOCBRADDIF, &ifr) < 0)
                 err(1, "can't add %s to bridge %s", if_name, br_name);
@@ -1296,64 +1429,75 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name)
 /* This sets up the Host end of the network device with an IP address, brings
  * it up so packets will flow, the copies the MAC address into the hwaddr
  * pointer. */
-static void configure_device(int fd, const char *devname, u32 ipaddr,
-                             unsigned char hwaddr[6])
+static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr)
 {
         struct ifreq ifr;
         struct sockaddr_in *sin = (struct sockaddr_in *)&ifr.ifr_addr;
 
-        /* Don't read these incantations.  Just cut & paste them like I did! */
         memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
-        strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, devname);
+        strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif);
+
+        /* Don't read these incantations.  Just cut & paste them like I did! */
         sin->sin_family = AF_INET;
         sin->sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(ipaddr);
         if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr) != 0)
-                err(1, "Setting %s interface address", devname);
+                err(1, "Setting %s interface address", tapif);
         ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_UP;
         if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFFLAGS, &ifr) != 0)
-                err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", devname);
-
-        /* SIOC stands for Socket I/O Control.  G means Get (vs S for Set
-         * above).  IF means Interface, and HWADDR is hardware address.
-         * Simple! */
-        if (ioctl(fd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) != 0)
-                err(1, "getting hw address for %s", devname);
-        memcpy(hwaddr, ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data, 6);
+                err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", tapif);
 }
 
-/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network.  This can either use bridging or
- * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject
- * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card.  We
- * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */
-static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg)
+static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ])
 {
-        struct device *dev;
         struct ifreq ifr;
-        int netfd, ipfd;
-        u32 ip;
-        const char *br_name = NULL;
-        struct virtio_net_config conf;
+        int netfd;
+
+        /* Start with this zeroed.  Messy but sure. */
+        memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
 
         /* We open the /dev/net/tun device and tell it we want a tap device.  A
          * tap device is like a tun device, only somehow different.  To tell
          * the truth, I completely blundered my way through this code, but it
          * works now! */
         netfd = open_or_die("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR);
-        memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
-        ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI;
+        ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_VNET_HDR;
         strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "tap%d");
         if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETIFF, &ifr) != 0)
                 err(1, "configuring /dev/net/tun");
+
+        if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETOFFLOAD,
+                  TUN_F_CSUM|TUN_F_TSO4|TUN_F_TSO6|TUN_F_TSO_ECN) != 0)
+                err(1, "Could not set features for tun device");
+
         /* We don't need checksums calculated for packets coming in this
          * device: trust us! */
         ioctl(netfd, TUNSETNOCSUM, 1);
 
+        memcpy(tapif, ifr.ifr_name, IFNAMSIZ);
+        return netfd;
+}
+
+/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network.  This can either use bridging or
+ * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject
+ * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card.  We
+ * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */
+static void setup_tun_net(char *arg)
+{
+        struct device *dev;
+        int netfd, ipfd;
+        u32 ip = INADDR_ANY;
+        bool bridging = false;
+        char tapif[IFNAMSIZ], *p;
+        struct virtio_net_config conf;
+
+        netfd = get_tun_device(tapif);
+
         /* First we create a new network device. */
         dev = new_device("net", VIRTIO_ID_NET, netfd, handle_tun_input);
 
         /* Network devices need a receive and a send queue, just like
          * console. */
-        add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd);
+        add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, net_enable_fd);
         add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, handle_net_output);
 
         /* We need a socket to perform the magic network ioctls to bring up the
@@ -1364,28 +1508,50 @@ static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg)
 
         /* If the command line was --tunnet=bridge:<name> do bridging. */
         if (!strncmp(BRIDGE_PFX, arg, strlen(BRIDGE_PFX))) {
-                ip = INADDR_ANY;
-                br_name = arg + strlen(BRIDGE_PFX);
-                add_to_bridge(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, br_name);
-        } else /* It is an IP address to set up the device with */
+                arg += strlen(BRIDGE_PFX);
+                bridging = true;
+        }
+
+        /* A mac address may follow the bridge name or IP address */
+        p = strchr(arg, ':');
+        if (p) {
+                str2mac(p+1, conf.mac);
+                add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
+                *p = '\0';
+        }
+
+        /* arg is now either an IP address or a bridge name */
+        if (bridging)
+                add_to_bridge(ipfd, tapif, arg);
+        else
                 ip = str2ip(arg);
 
-        /* Set up the tun device, and get the mac address for the interface. */
-        configure_device(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, ip, conf.mac);
+        /* Set up the tun device. */
+        configure_device(ipfd, tapif, ip);
 
-        /* Tell Guest what MAC address to use. */
-        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY);
+        /* Expect Guest to handle everything except UFO */
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO6);
+        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN);
         set_config(dev, sizeof(conf), &conf);
 
         /* We don't need the socket any more; setup is done. */
         close(ipfd);
 
-        verbose("device %u: tun net %u.%u.%u.%u\n",
-                devices.device_num++,
-                (u8)(ip>>24),(u8)(ip>>16),(u8)(ip>>8),(u8)ip);
-        if (br_name)
-                verbose("attached to bridge: %s\n", br_name);
+        devices.device_num++;
+
+        if (bridging)
+                verbose("device %u: tun %s attached to bridge: %s\n",
+                        devices.device_num, tapif, arg);
+        else
+                verbose("device %u: tun %s: %s\n",
+                        devices.device_num, tapif, arg);
 }
 
 /* Our block (disk) device should be really simple: the Guest asks for a block
@@ -1550,7 +1716,7 @@ static bool handle_io_finish(int fd, struct device *dev)
 }
 
 /* When the Guest submits some I/O, we just need to wake the I/O thread. */
-static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq)
+static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
 {
         struct vblk_info *vblk = vq->dev->priv;
         char c = 0;
@@ -1621,6 +1787,64 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename)
         verbose("device %u: virtblock %llu sectors\n",
                 devices.device_num, le64_to_cpu(conf.capacity));
 }
+
+/* Our random number generator device reads from /dev/random into the Guest's
+ * input buffers.  The usual case is that the Guest doesn't want random numbers
+ * and so has no buffers although /dev/random is still readable, whereas
+ * console is the reverse.
+ *
+ * The same logic applies, however. */
+static bool handle_rng_input(int fd, struct device *dev)
+{
+        int len;
+        unsigned int head, in_num, out_num, totlen = 0;
+        struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num];
+
+        /* First we need a buffer from the Guests's virtqueue. */
+        head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num);
+
+        /* If they're not ready for input, stop listening to this file
+         * descriptor.  We'll start again once they add an input buffer. */
+        if (head == dev->vq->vring.num)
+                return false;
+
+        if (out_num)
+                errx(1, "Output buffers in rng?");
+
+        /* This is why we convert to iovecs: the readv() call uses them, and so
+         * it reads straight into the Guest's buffer.  We loop to make sure we
+         * fill it. */
+        while (!iov_empty(iov, in_num)) {
+                len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num);
+                if (len <= 0)
+                        err(1, "Read from /dev/random gave %i", len);
+                iov_consume(iov, in_num, len);
+                totlen += len;
+        }
+
+        /* Tell the Guest about the new input. */
+        add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, totlen);
+
+        /* Everything went OK! */
+        return true;
+}
+
+/* And this creates a "hardware" random number device for the Guest. */
+static void setup_rng(void)
+{
+        struct device *dev;
+        int fd;
+
+        fd = open_or_die("/dev/random", O_RDONLY);
+
+        /* The device responds to return from I/O thread. */
+        dev = new_device("rng", VIRTIO_ID_RNG, fd, handle_rng_input);
+
+        /* The device has one virtqueue, where the Guest places inbufs. */
+        add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd);
+
+        verbose("device %u: rng\n", devices.device_num++);
+}
 /* That's the end of device setup. */
 
 /*L:230 Reboot is pretty easy: clean up and exec() the Launcher afresh. */
@@ -1628,11 +1852,12 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) restart_guest(void)
 {
         unsigned int i;
 
-        /* Closing pipes causes the Waker thread and io_threads to die, and
-         * closing /dev/lguest cleans up the Guest.  Since we don't track all
-         * open fds, we simply close everything beyond stderr. */
+        /* Since we don't track all open fds, we simply close everything beyond
+         * stderr. */
         for (i = 3; i < FD_SETSIZE; i++)
                 close(i);
+
+        /* The exec automatically gets rid of the I/O and Waker threads. */
         execv(main_args[0], main_args);
         err(1, "Could not exec %s", main_args[0]);
 }
@@ -1663,7 +1888,7 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) run_guest(int lguest_fd)
                 /* ERESTART means that we need to reboot the guest */
                 } else if (errno == ERESTART) {
                         restart_guest();
-                /* EAGAIN means the Waker wanted us to look at some input.
+                /* EAGAIN means a signal (timeout).
                  * Anything else means a bug or incompatible change. */
                 } else if (errno != EAGAIN)
                         err(1, "Running guest failed");
@@ -1691,13 +1916,14 @@ static struct option opts[] = {
         { "verbose", 0, NULL, 'v' },
         { "tunnet", 1, NULL, 't' },
         { "block", 1, NULL, 'b' },
+        { "rng", 0, NULL, 'r' },
         { "initrd", 1, NULL, 'i' },
         { NULL },
 };
 static void usage(void)
 {
         errx(1, "Usage: lguest [--verbose] "
-             "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>)\n"
+             "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>:<macaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>:<macaddr>)\n"
              "|--block=<filename>|--initrd=<filename>]...\n"
              "<mem-in-mb> vmlinux [args...]");
 }
@@ -1765,6 +1991,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
                 case 'b':
                         setup_block_file(optarg);
                         break;
+                case 'r':
+                        setup_rng();
+                        break;
                 case 'i':
                         initrd_name = optarg;
                         break;
@@ -1783,6 +2012,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
         /* We always have a console device */
         setup_console();
 
+        /* We can timeout waiting for Guest network transmit. */
+        setup_timeout();
+
         /* Now we load the kernel */
         start = load_kernel(open_or_die(argv[optind+1], O_RDONLY));
 
@@ -1826,10 +2058,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
          * /dev/lguest file descriptor. */
         lguest_fd = tell_kernel(pgdir, start);
 
-        /* We fork off a child process, which wakes the Launcher whenever one
-         * of the input file descriptors needs attention.  We call this the
-         * Waker, and we'll cover it in a moment. */
-        waker_fd = setup_waker(lguest_fd);
+        /* We clone off a thread, which wakes the Launcher whenever one of the
+         * input file descriptors needs attention.  We call this the Waker, and
+         * we'll cover it in a moment. */
+        setup_waker(lguest_fd);
 
         /* Finally, run the Guest.  This doesn't return. */
         run_guest(lguest_fd);
diff --git a/Documentation/local_ops.txt b/Documentation/local_ops.txt
index 4269a1105b37..f4f8b1c6c8ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/local_ops.txt
+++ b/Documentation/local_ops.txt
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ It can be done by slightly modifying the standard atomic operations : only
 their UP variant must be kept. It typically means removing LOCK prefix (on
 i386 and x86_64) and any SMP sychronization barrier. If the architecture does
 not have a different behavior between SMP and UP, including asm-generic/local.h
-in your archtecture's local.h is sufficient.
+in your architecture's local.h is sufficient.
 
 The local_t type is defined as an opaque signed long by embedding an
 atomic_long_t inside a structure. This is made so a cast from this type to a
diff --git a/Documentation/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/moxa-smartio
index fe24ecc6372e..5337e80a5b96 100644
--- a/Documentation/moxa-smartio
+++ b/Documentation/moxa-smartio
@@ -1,14 +1,22 @@
 =============================================================================
-
-        MOXA Smartio Family Device Driver Ver 1.1 Installation Guide
-                    for Linux Kernel 2.2.x and 2.0.3x
-               Copyright (C) 1999, Moxa Technologies Co, Ltd.
+          MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
+                    for Linux Kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x
+               Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
 =============================================================================
+Date: 01/21/2008
+
 Content
 
 1. Introduction
 2. System Requirement
 3. Installation
+   3.1 Hardware installation
+   3.2 Driver files
+   3.3 Device naming convention
+   3.4 Module driver configuration
+   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
+   3.6 Custom configuration
+   3.7 Verify driver installation
 4. Utilities
 5. Setserial
 6. Troubleshooting
@@ -16,27 +24,48 @@ Content
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 1. Introduction
 
-   The Smartio family Linux driver, Ver. 1.1, supports following multiport
+   The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport
    boards.
 
-    -C104P/H/HS, C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI, CI-104J 4 port multiport board.
-    -C168P/H/HS, C168H/PCI 8 port multiport board.
-
-   This driver has been modified a little and cleaned up from the Moxa
-   contributed driver code and merged into Linux 2.2.14pre. In particular
-   official major/minor numbers have been assigned which are different to
-   those the original Moxa supplied driver used.
+    - 2 ports multiport board
+        CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF
+        CP-132U-I, CP-132UL,
+        CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS,
+        CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS,
+        (C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S)
+
+    - 4 ports multiport board
+        CP-104EL,
+        CP-104UL, CP-104JU,
+        CP-134U, CP-134U-I,
+        C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI,
+        CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL,
+        C104H, C104HS,
+        CI-104J, CI-104JS,
+        CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS,
+        (C114HI, CT-114I, C104P)
+        POS-104UL,
+        CB-114,
+        CB-134I
+
+    - 8 ports multiport board
+        CP-118EL, CP-168EL,
+        CP-118U, CP-168U,
+        C168H/PCI,
+        C168H, C168HS,
+        (C168P),
+        CB-108
 
    This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel
-   2.2.5 and backward compatible to 2.0.3x. This driver supports Intel x86 and
-   Alpha hardware platform. In order to maintain compatibility, this version
-   has also been properly tested with RedHat, OpenLinux, TurboLinux and
-   S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem occurs, please contact
-   Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
+   2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order
+   to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with
+   RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem
+   occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
 
    In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this
    version. They are
-    - msdiag     Diagnostic program for detecting installed Moxa Smartio boards.
+    - msdiag     Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
+                 Smartio/Industio boards.
     - msmon      Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
     - msterm     A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial
                  ports.
@@ -47,8 +76,7 @@ Content
    GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General
    Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail.
 
-   In Moxa's ftp sites, you may always find latest driver at
-   ftp://ftp.moxa.com  or ftp://ftp.moxa.com.tw.
+   In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://web.moxa.com.
 
    This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver)
    or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following
@@ -61,8 +89,8 @@ Content
 
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 2. System Requirement
-   - Hardware platform: Intel x86 or Alpha machine
-   - Kernel version: 2.0.3x or 2.2.x
+   - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine
+   - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x
    - gcc version 2.72 or later
    - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination
 
@@ -70,9 +98,18 @@ Content
 3. Installation
 
    3.1 Hardware installation
+   3.2 Driver files
+   3.3 Device naming convention
+   3.4 Module driver configuration
+   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x.
+   3.6 Custom configuration
+   3.7 Verify driver installation
+
+
+   3.1 Hardware installation
 
-       There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio family multiport
-       board.
+       There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
+       family multiport board.
 
        ISA board
        ---------
@@ -81,47 +118,57 @@ Content
        installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
        Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
 
-       PCI board
-       ---------
+       PCI/UPCI board
+       --------------
        You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
        with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
        procedure in User's Manual in advance.
 
-       IRQ Sharing
+       PCI IRQ Sharing
        -----------
        Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
-       4 Moxa Smartio Family multiport boards can be installed together on
-       one system and they can share the same IRQ.
+       4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
+       together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
+
 
-   3.2 Driver files and device naming convention
+   3.2 Driver files
 
        The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
        first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
        directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below.
 
+       # cd /
+       # mkdir moxa
        # cd /moxa
-       # tar xvf /dev/fd0 
+       # tar xvf /dev/fd0
+
        or
+
+       # cd /
+       # mkdir moxa
        # cd /moxa
        # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz .
        # tar xvfz mxser.tgz
 
+
+   3.3 Device naming convention
+
        You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
        Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
-       run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.3.
-       If static driver is required, please refer to 3.4.
+       run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
+       If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
 
        Dialin and callout port
        -----------------------
-       This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There're
+       This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
        two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
        which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
        is "cumxx".
 
        Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
        -----------------------------------------------
-       Naming convention for each Smartio multiport board is pre-defined
-       as below.
+       Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
+       pre-defined as below.
 
        Board Num.        Dial-in Port         Callout port
        1st board        ttyM0  - ttyM7        cum0  - cum7
@@ -129,6 +176,12 @@ Content
        3rd board        ttyM16 - ttyM23       cum16 - cum23
        4th board        ttyM24 - ttym31       cum24 - cum31
 
+
+       !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+       Under Kernel 2.6 the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
+       device instead.
+       !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+
        Board sequence
        --------------
        This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
@@ -138,69 +191,131 @@ Content
        For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
        has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
 
-   3.3 Module driver configuration
+   3.4 Module driver configuration
        Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
        installation, please skip this paragraph.
-       1. Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
 
-          # make install
+
+       ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver--------------------
+       3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
+          Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
+          which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
+          script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
+          This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
+          need to do this procedure when:
+          a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
+             section.
+          b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
+             add/delete one MOXA board.
+          c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
+             shell script "msmknod"
+
+          The procedure is:
+          # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+          # ./msmknod
+
+          This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
+          device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
+          to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
+          numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
+          you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
+          for more detailed procedure.
+          Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
+          naming.
+
+       3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
+          Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
+          all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
+          But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
+          code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
+          "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
+
+          Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
+
+          # make clean; make install
+
+          !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+          For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
+          # make clean; make installsp1
+
+          For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
+          # make clean; make installsp2
+          !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
 
           The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
-          and copied to system directories respectively.Then run
+          and copied to system directories respectively.
 
-          # insmod mxser
+       ------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
+       3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
 
-          to activate the modular driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
-          if "mxser.o" is activated.
+          # modprobe mxser <argument>
 
-       2. Create special files by executing "msmknod".
-          # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
-          # ./msmknod
+          will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
+          if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
+          <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
+          information.
+
+
+       ------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
+       3.4.4 For the above description, you may manually execute
+          "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
+          "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
+          However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
+          eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
+          achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
+          the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
 
-          Default major numbers for dial-in device and callout device are
-          174, 175. Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same
-          device naming.
+          But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
+          to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
+          rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
+          manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
+          encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
+          completed, follow the below step.
 
-       3. Up to now, you may manually execute "insmod mxser" to activate
-          this driver and run "rmmod mxser" to remove it. However, it's
-          better to have a boot time configuration to eliminate manual
-          operation.
-          Boot time configuration can be achieved by rc file. Run following
-          command for setting rc files.
+          Run following command for setting rc files.
 
           # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
           # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
           # cd /etc/rc.d
 
-          You may have to modify part of the content in rc.mxser to specify
-          parameters for ISA board. Please refer to rc.mxser for more detail.
-          Find "rc.serial". If "rc.serial" doesn't exist, create it by vi.
-          Add "rc.mxser" in last line. Next, open rc.local by vi
-          and append following content.
+          Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
+          create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
+          Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line,
 
-          if [ -f /etc/rc.d/rc.serial ]; then
-             sh /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
-          fi
+          Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
 
-       4. Reboot and check if mxser.o activated by "lsmod" command.
-       5. If you'd like to drive Smartio ISA boards in the system, you'll
-          have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given board while
-          activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are as follows.
+       3.4.5. If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
+          you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
+          board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
+          as follows.
 
-          insmod mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
+          modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
                                 |      |     |    |
                                 |      |     |    +- 4th ISA board
                                 |      |     +------ 3rd ISA board
                                 |      +------------ 2nd ISA board
                                 +------------------- 1st ISA board
 
-   3.4 Static driver configuration
+   3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
+
+       Note: To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
+             source package.
+
+       3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel.
+          # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
+          # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
+
+          For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
+          # cd /usr/src
+          # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
 
-       1. Create link
+       3.5.2 Create link
           # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
           # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c
 
-       2. Add CAP address list for ISA boards
+       3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. For PCI boards user,
+          please skip this step.
+
           In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
           parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
           assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
@@ -222,73 +337,55 @@ Content
              static int mxserBoardCAP[]
              = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
 
-       3. Modify tty_io.c
-          # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/
-          # vi tty_io.c
-            Find pty_init(), insert "mxser_init()" as
+       3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
 
-            pty_init();
-            mxser_init();
+          Configure the kernel:
 
-       4. Modify tty.h
-          # cd /usr/src/linux/include/linux
-          # vi tty.h
-            Find extern int tty_init(void), insert "mxser_init()" as
+            # cd /usr/src/linux
+            # make menuconfig
 
-            extern int tty_init(void);
-            extern int mxser_init(void);
-     
-       5. Modify Makefile
-          # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
-          # vi Makefile
-            Find L_OBJS := tty_io.o ...... random.o, add
-            "mxser.o" at last of this line as
-            L_OBJS := tty_io.o ....... mxser.o
+          You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
+          devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
+          SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
+          select [Exit] to exit this program.
 
-       6. Rebuild kernel
-          The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding,for your reference only.
+       3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
+          The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
+          reference only.
           For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document.
 
-          If 'lilo' utility is installed, please use 'make zlilo' to rebuild
-          kernel. If 'lilo' is not installed, please follow the following steps.
-
            a. cd /usr/src/linux
-           b. make clean                             /* take a few minutes */
-           c. make bzImage                 /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
-           d. Backup original boot kernel.                /* optional step */
-           e. cp /usr/src/linux/arch/i386/boot/bzImage /boot/vmlinuz
+           b. make clean             /* take a few minutes */
+           c. make dep               /* take a few minutes */
+           d. make bzImage           /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
+           e. make install           /* copy boot image to correct position */
            f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
-              correct position. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should
-              check /etc/lilo.conf 'image' item specified the path
-              which is the 'vmlinuz' path, or you will load wrong
-              (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
-           g. chmod 400 /vmlinuz
-           h. lilo
-           i. rdev -R /vmlinuz 1
-           j. sync
-
-          Note that if the result of "make zImage" is ERROR, then you have to
-          go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make config" in directory
-          /usr/src/linux or "setup".
-
-          Since system include file, /usr/src/linux/include/linux/interrupt.h,
-          is modified each time the MOXA driver is installed, kernel rebuilding
-          is inevitable. And it takes about 10 to 20 minutes depends on the
-          machine.
-
-       7. Make utility
-          # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
-          # make install
-       
-       8. Make special file
+              correct position.
+           g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
+              'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
+              or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
+              After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
+
+          Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to
+          go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in
+          directory /usr/src/linux.
+
+
+       3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
           # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
           # ./msmknod
 
-       9. Reboot
+       3.5.7 Make utility
+          # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
+          # make clean; make install
+
+       3.5.8 Reboot
 
-   3.5 Custom configuration
+
+
+   3.6 Custom configuration
        Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
-       still can change the device name and major number.The instruction to
+       still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
        change these parameters are shown as below.
 
        Change Device name
@@ -306,33 +403,37 @@ Content
        2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
        major numbers.
 
-       1. Find free major numbers
+       3.6.1 Find free major numbers
           In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
           in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
           e.g. 40, 45.
-       2. Create special files
+       3.6.2 Create special files
           Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
           specified major numbers.
-       3. Modify driver with new major number
+       3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
           Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
           contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below.
           #define         MXSERMAJOR              40
           #define         MXSERCUMAJOR            45
-       4. Run # make install in /moxa/mxser/driver.
+       3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
 
-   3.6 Verify driver installation
+   3.7 Verify driver installation
        You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
        log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
+
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 4. Utilities
    There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and
    msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should
    be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin.
 
+   Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and
+   make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility.
+
    msdiag - Diagnostic
    --------------------
-   This utility provides the function to detect what Moxa Smartio multiport
-   board exists in the system.
+   This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio
+   board found by driver in the system.
 
    msmon - Port Monitoring
    -----------------------
@@ -353,12 +454,13 @@ Content
    application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the
    port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a
    dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation.
+
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 5. Setserial
 
    Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below.
 
-   uart           set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
+   uart           set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
    close_delay    set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR
                   should be kept low while being closed.
    closing_wait   set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the
@@ -366,7 +468,13 @@ Content
                   being closed, before the receiver is disable.
    spd_hi         Use  57.6kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
    spd_vhi        Use  115.2kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_shi        Use  230.4kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_warp       Use  460.8kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
    spd_normal     Use  38.4kb  when  the application requests 38.4kb.
+   spd_cust       Use  the custom divisor to set the speed when  the
+                  application requests 38.4kb.
+   divisor        This option set the custom divison.
+   baud_base      This option set the base baud rate.
 
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 6. Troubleshooting
@@ -375,8 +483,9 @@ Content
    possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical
    support team to get more help.
 
-   Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio family boards found. Fifth board and
-              after are ignored.
+
+   Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
+              and after are ignored.
    Solution:
    To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa
    driver supports up to 4 boards.
@@ -384,7 +493,7 @@ Content
    Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
    Solution:
    Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure
-   which device causes the situation,please check /proc/interrupts to find
+   which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find
    free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board.
 
    Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
@@ -397,15 +506,18 @@ Content
    Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual
    "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector.
 
-   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family driver!
+   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
    Solution:
    Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices.
-   Please refer to previous section 3.5 to change a free major number for
+   Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for
    Moxa driver.
 
-   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family callout driver!
+   Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
    Solution:
    Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may
-   conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.5 to
+   conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to
    change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver.
+
+
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6d8af1ac56c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := ifenslave
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
index 7fa7fe71d7a8..688dfe1e6b70 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ xmit_hash_policy
                 in environments where a layer3 gateway device is
                 required to reach most destinations.
 
-                This algorithm is 802.3ad complient.
+                This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant.
 
         layer3+4
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
index 641d2afacffa..297ba7b1ccaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
 
   The Linux network devices (by default) just can handle the
   transmission and reception of media dependent frames. Due to the
-  arbritration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID
+  arbitration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID
   may be delayed by the reception of a high prio CAN frame. To
   reflect the correct* traffic on the node the loopback of the sent
   data has to be performed right after a successful transmission. If
@@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
   - stats_timer: To calculate the Socket CAN core statistics
     (e.g. current/maximum frames per second) this 1 second timer is
     invoked at can.ko module start time by default. This timer can be
-    disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module comandline.
+    disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module commandline.
 
   - debug: (removed since SocketCAN SVN r546)
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
index 61b171cf5313..2df71861e578 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
@@ -513,21 +513,11 @@ Additional Configurations
   Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection
   Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter
   Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter
-  Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter 
+  Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter
 
   NAPI
   ----
-  NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e1000 driver.  NAPI is enabled
-  or disabled based on the configuration of the kernel.  To override
-  the default, use the following compile-time flags.
-
-  To enable NAPI, compile the driver module, passing in a configuration option:
-
-       make CFLAGS_EXTRA=-DE1000_NAPI install
-
-  To disable NAPI, compile the driver module, passing in a configuration option:
-
-       make CFLAGS_EXTRA=-DE1000_NO_NAPI install
+  NAPI (Rx polling mode) is enabled in the e1000 driver.
 
   See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
index a12059886755..1b96ccda3836 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
@@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
 
                 }
 
-                ipaddr = ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data;
+                ipaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data;
                 v_print("Interface '%s': set IP %s to %d.%d.%d.%d\n",
                         slave_ifname, ifra[i].desc,
                         ipaddr[0], ipaddr[1], ipaddr[2], ipaddr[3]);
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
index db0cd5169581..07c53d596035 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ just one call to mmap is needed:
     mmap(0, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0);
 
 If tp_frame_size is a divisor of tp_block_size frames will be 
-contiguosly spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each 
+contiguously spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each
 tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames there will be a gap between 
 the frames. This is because a frame cannot be spawn across two
 blocks. 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt
index 01e716d185f4..dcadf6f88e34 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt
@@ -4,26 +4,27 @@ The "enviromental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are:
 1) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching
 from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth.
 
-For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later
-or intentionaly branches by redirecting a packet then you need to
+For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later,
+or intentionally branches by redirecting a packet, then you need to
 clone the packet.
+
 There are certain fields in the skb tc_verd that need to be reset so we
-avoid loops etc. A few are generic enough so much so that skb_act_clone()
-resets them for you. So invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone()
+avoid loops, etc.  A few are generic enough that skb_act_clone()
+resets them for you, so invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone().
 
 2) If you munge any packet thou shalt call pskb_expand_head in the case
 someone else is referencing the skb. After that you "own" the skb.
 You must also tell us if it is ok to munge the packet (TC_OK2MUNGE),
 this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet.
 
-3) dropping packets you dont own is a nono. You simply return
+3) Dropping packets you don't own is a no-no. You simply return
 TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it.
 
 The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are:
 
-*) thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being
+*) Thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being
 TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is
-returned then all is great and you dont need to do anything.
+returned, then all is great and you don't need to do anything.
 
 Post on netdev if something is unclear.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt b/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt
index 3870f280280b..855d8da57a23 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@
         getsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_NO_CHECK, &value, ...);
 
   is meaningless (as in TCP). Packets with a zero checksum field are
-  illegal (cf. RFC 3828, sec. 3.1) will be silently discarded.
+  illegal (cf. RFC 3828, sec. 3.1) and will be silently discarded.
 
   4) Fragmentation
 
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..accde871ae77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := crc32hash
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_crc32hash.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c
index cbc36d299af8..4210e5abab8a 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) {
                 printf("no string passed as argument\n");
                 return -1;
         }
-        result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
+        result = crc32((unsigned char const *)argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
         printf("0x%x\n", result);
         return 0;
 }
diff --git a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX
index a55d7f1c836d..fb742c213c9e 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
 00-INDEX
         - This file
+apm-acpi.txt
+        - basic info about the APM and ACPI support.
 basic-pm-debugging.txt
         - Debugging suspend and resume
 devices.txt
@@ -14,8 +16,6 @@ notifiers.txt
         - Registering suspend notifiers in device drivers
 pci.txt
         - How the PCI Subsystem Does Power Management
-pm.txt
-        - info on Linux power management support.
 pm_qos_interface.txt
         - info on Linux PM Quality of Service interface
 power_supply_class.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1bd799dc17e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+APM or ACPI?
+------------
+If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system,
+odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or
+Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI).  ACPI is the newer
+of the two technologies and puts power management in the hands of the
+operating system, allowing for more intelligent power management than
+is possible with BIOS controlled APM.
+
+The best way to determine which, if either, your system supports is to
+build a kernel with both ACPI and APM enabled (as of 2.3.x ACPI is
+enabled by default).  If a working ACPI implementation is found, the
+ACPI driver will override and disable APM, otherwise the APM driver
+will be used.
+
+No, sorry, you cannot have both ACPI and APM enabled and running at
+once.  Some people with broken ACPI or broken APM implementations
+would like to use both to get a full set of working features, but you
+simply cannot mix and match the two.  Only one power management
+interface can be in control of the machine at once.  Think about it..
+
+User-space Daemons
+------------------
+Both APM and ACPI rely on user-space daemons, apmd and acpid
+respectively, to be completely functional.  Obtain both of these
+daemons from your Linux distribution or from the Internet (see below)
+and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process.
+Go ahead and start both.  If ACPI or APM is not available on your
+system the associated daemon will exit gracefully.
+
+  apmd:   http://worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/apmd/
+  acpid:  http://acpid.sf.net/
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm.txt b/Documentation/power/pm.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index be841507e43f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/power/pm.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,257 +0,0 @@
-               Linux Power Management Support
-
-This document briefly describes how to use power management with your
-Linux system and how to add power management support to Linux drivers.
-
-APM or ACPI?
-------------
-If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system,
-odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or
-Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI).  ACPI is the newer
-of the two technologies and puts power management in the hands of the
-operating system, allowing for more intelligent power management than
-is possible with BIOS controlled APM.
-
-The best way to determine which, if either, your system supports is to
-build a kernel with both ACPI and APM enabled (as of 2.3.x ACPI is
-enabled by default).  If a working ACPI implementation is found, the
-ACPI driver will override and disable APM, otherwise the APM driver
-will be used.
-
-No, sorry, you cannot have both ACPI and APM enabled and running at
-once.  Some people with broken ACPI or broken APM implementations
-would like to use both to get a full set of working features, but you
-simply cannot mix and match the two.  Only one power management
-interface can be in control of the machine at once.  Think about it..
-
-User-space Daemons
-------------------
-Both APM and ACPI rely on user-space daemons, apmd and acpid
-respectively, to be completely functional.  Obtain both of these
-daemons from your Linux distribution or from the Internet (see below)
-and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process.
-Go ahead and start both.  If ACPI or APM is not available on your
-system the associated daemon will exit gracefully.
-
-  apmd:   http://worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/apmd/
-  acpid:  http://acpid.sf.net/
-
-Driver Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE!
-----------------*************************
-
-Note: pm_register(), pm_access(), pm_dev_idle() and friends are
-obsolete. Please do not use them. Instead you should properly hook
-your driver into the driver model, and use its suspend()/resume()
-callbacks to do this kind of stuff.
-
-If you are writing a new driver or maintaining an old driver, it
-should include power management support.  Without power management
-support, a single driver may prevent a system with power management
-capabilities from ever being able to suspend (safely).
-
-Overview:
-1) Register each instance of a device with "pm_register"
-2) Call "pm_access" before accessing the hardware.
-   (this will ensure that the hardware is awake and ready)
-3) Your "pm_callback" is called before going into a
-   suspend state (ACPI D1-D3) or after resuming (ACPI D0)
-   from a suspend.
-4) Call "pm_dev_idle" when the device is not being used
-   (optional but will improve device idle detection)
-5) When unloaded, unregister the device with "pm_unregister"
-
-/*
- * Description: Register a device with the power-management subsystem
- *
- * Parameters:
- *   type - device type (PCI device, system device, ...)
- *   id - instance number or unique identifier
- *   cback - request handler callback (suspend, resume, ...)
- *
- * Returns: Registered PM device or NULL on error
- *
- * Examples:
- *   dev = pm_register(PM_SYS_DEV, PM_SYS_VGA, vga_callback);
- *
- *   struct pci_dev *pci_dev = pci_find_dev(...);
- *   dev = pm_register(PM_PCI_DEV, PM_PCI_ID(pci_dev), callback);
- */
-struct pm_dev *pm_register(pm_dev_t type, unsigned long id, pm_callback cback);
-
-/*
- * Description: Unregister a device with the power management subsystem
- *
- * Parameters:
- *   dev - PM device previously returned from pm_register
- */
-void pm_unregister(struct pm_dev *dev);
-
-/*
- * Description: Unregister all devices with a matching callback function
- *
- * Parameters:
- *   cback - previously registered request callback
- *
- * Notes: Provided for easier porting from old APM interface
- */
-void pm_unregister_all(pm_callback cback);
-
-/*
- * Power management request callback
- *
- * Parameters:
- *   dev - PM device previously returned from pm_register
- *   rqst - request type
- *   data - data, if any, associated with the request
- *
- * Returns: 0 if the request is successful
- *          EINVAL if the request is not supported
- *          EBUSY if the device is now busy and cannot handle the request
- *          ENOMEM if the device was unable to handle the request due to memory
- *
- * Details: The device request callback will be called before the
- *          device/system enters a suspend state (ACPI D1-D3) or
- *          or after the device/system resumes from suspend (ACPI D0).
- *          For PM_SUSPEND, the ACPI D-state being entered is passed
- *          as the "data" argument to the callback.  The device
- *          driver should save (PM_SUSPEND) or restore (PM_RESUME)
- *          device context when the request callback is called.
- *
- *          Once a driver returns 0 (success) from a suspend
- *          request, it should not process any further requests or
- *          access the device hardware until a call to "pm_access" is made.
- */
-typedef int (*pm_callback)(struct pm_dev *dev, pm_request_t rqst, void *data);
-
-Driver Details
---------------
-This is just a quick Q&A as a stopgap until a real driver writers'
-power management guide is available.
-
-Q: When is a device suspended?
-
-Devices can be suspended based on direct user request (eg. laptop lid
-closes), system power policy (eg.  sleep after 30 minutes of console
-inactivity), or device power policy (eg. power down device after 5
-minutes of inactivity)
-
-Q: Must a driver honor a suspend request?
-
-No, a driver can return -EBUSY from a suspend request and this
-will stop the system from suspending.  When a suspend request
-fails, all suspended devices are resumed and the system continues
-to run.  Suspend can be retried at a later time.
-
-Q: Can the driver block suspend/resume requests?
-
-Yes, a driver can delay its return from a suspend or resume
-request until the device is ready to handle requests.  It
-is advantageous to return as quickly as possible from a
-request as suspend/resume are done serially.
-
-Q: What context is a suspend/resume initiated from?
-
-A suspend or resume is initiated from a kernel thread context.
-It is safe to block, allocate memory, initiate requests
-or anything else you can do within the kernel.
-
-Q: Will requests continue to arrive after a suspend?
-
-Possibly.  It is the driver's responsibility to queue(*),
-fail, or drop any requests that arrive after returning
-success to a suspend request.  It is important that the
-driver not access its device until after it receives
-a resume request as the device's bus may no longer
-be active.
-
-(*) If a driver queues requests for processing after
-    resume be aware that the device, network, etc.
-    might be in a different state than at suspend time.
-    It's probably better to drop requests unless
-    the driver is a storage device.
-
-Q: Do I have to manage bus-specific power management registers
-
-No.  It is the responsibility of the bus driver to manage
-PCI, USB, etc. power management registers.  The bus driver
-or the power management subsystem will also enable any
-wake-on functionality that the device has.
-
-Q: So, really, what do I need to do to support suspend/resume?
-
-You need to save any device context that would
-be lost if the device was powered off and then restore
-it at resume time.  When ACPI is active, there are
-three levels of device suspend states; D1, D2, and D3.
-(The suspend state is passed as the "data" argument
-to the device callback.)  With D3, the device is powered
-off and loses all context, D1 and D2 are shallower power
-states and require less device context to be saved.  To
-play it safe, just save everything at suspend and restore
-everything at resume.
-
-Q: Where do I store device context for suspend?
-
-Anywhere in memory, kmalloc a buffer or store it
-in the device descriptor.  You are guaranteed that the
-contents of memory will be restored and accessible
-before resume, even when the system suspends to disk.
-
-Q: What do I need to do for ACPI vs. APM vs. etc?
-
-Drivers need not be aware of the specific power management
-technology that is active.  They just need to be aware
-of when the overlying power management system requests
-that they suspend or resume.
-
-Q: What about device dependencies?
-
-When a driver registers a device, the power management
-subsystem uses the information provided to build a
-tree of device dependencies (eg. USB device X is on
-USB controller Y which is on PCI bus Z)  When power
-management wants to suspend a device, it first sends
-a suspend request to its driver, then the bus driver,
-and so on up to the system bus.  Device resumes
-proceed in the opposite direction.
-
-Q: Who do I contact for additional information about
-   enabling power management for my specific driver/device?
-
-ACPI Development mailing list: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
-
-System Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE!
-----------------*************************
-If you are providing new power management support to Linux (ie.
-adding support for something like APM or ACPI), you should
-communicate with drivers through the existing generic power
-management interface.
-
-/*
- * Send a request to all devices
- *
- * Parameters:
- *   rqst - request type
- *   data - data, if any, associated with the request
- *
- * Returns: 0 if the request is successful
- *          See "pm_callback" return for errors
- *
- * Details: Walk list of registered devices and call pm_send
- *          for each until complete or an error is encountered.
- *          If an error is encountered for a suspend request,
- *          return all devices to the state they were in before
- *          the suspend request.
- */
-int pm_send_all(pm_request_t rqst, void *data);
-
-/*
- * Find a matching device
- *
- * Parameters:
- *   type - device type (PCI device, system device, or 0 to match all devices)
- *   from - previous match or NULL to start from the beginning
- *
- * Returns: Matching device or NULL if none found
- */
-struct pm_dev *pm_find(pm_dev_t type, struct pm_dev *from);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
index 49adb1a33514..c40866e8b957 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-PM quality of Service interface.
+PM Quality Of Service Interface.
 
 This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering
 performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on
@@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ one of the parameters.
 Currently we have {cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput} as the
 initial set of pm_qos parameters.
 
+Each parameters have defined units:
+ * latency: usec
+ * timeout: usec
+ * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec)
+
 The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented
 parameter.  The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init()
 and pm_qos_params.h.  This is done because having the available parameters
diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
index a8686e5a6857..c6cd4956047c 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
@@ -101,6 +101,10 @@ of charge when battery became full/empty". It also could mean "value of
 charge when battery considered full/empty at given conditions (temperature,
 age)". I.e. these attributes represents real thresholds, not design values.
 
+CHARGE_COUNTER - the current charge counter (in µAh).  This could easily
+be negative; there is no empty or full value.  It is only useful for
+relative, time-based measurements.
+
 ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy.
 
 CAPACITY - capacity in percents.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..82b7a43aadba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+Regulator Consumer Driver Interface
+===================================
+
+This text describes the regulator interface for consumer device drivers.
+Please see overview.txt for a description of the terms used in this text.
+
+
+1. Consumer Regulator Access (static & dynamic drivers)
+=======================================================
+
+A consumer driver can get access to it's supply regulator by calling :-
+
+regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");
+
+The consumer passes in it's struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core
+then finds the correct regulator by consulting a machine specific lookup table.
+If the lookup is successful then this call will return a pointer to the struct
+regulator that supplies this consumer.
+
+To release the regulator the consumer driver should call :-
+
+regulator_put(regulator);
+
+Consumers can be supplied by more than one regulator e.g. codec consumer with
+analog and digital supplies :-
+
+digital = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");  /* digital core */
+analog = regulator_get(dev, "Avdd");  /* analog */
+
+The regulator access functions regulator_get() and regulator_put() will
+usually be called in your device drivers probe() and remove() respectively.
+
+
+2. Regulator Output Enable & Disable (static & dynamic drivers)
+====================================================================
+
+A consumer can enable it's power supply by calling:-
+
+int regulator_enable(regulator);
+
+NOTE: The supply may already be enabled before regulator_enabled() is called.
+This may happen if the consumer shares the regulator or the regulator has been
+previously enabled by bootloader or kernel board initialization code.
+
+A consumer can determine if a regulator is enabled by calling :-
+
+int regulator_is_enabled(regulator);
+
+This will return > zero when the regulator is enabled.
+
+
+A consumer can disable it's supply when no longer needed by calling :-
+
+int regulator_disable(regulator);
+
+NOTE: This may not disable the supply if it's shared with other consumers. The
+regulator will only be disabled when the enabled reference count is zero.
+
+Finally, a regulator can be forcefully disabled in the case of an emergency :-
+
+int regulator_force_disable(regulator);
+
+NOTE: this will immediately and forcefully shutdown the regulator output. All
+consumers will be powered off.
+
+
+3. Regulator Voltage Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
+======================================================
+
+Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply
+voltage to match system operating points. e.g. CPUfreq drivers can scale
+voltage along with frequency to save power, SD drivers may need to select the
+correct card voltage, etc.
+
+Consumers can control their supply voltage by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_voltage(regulator, min_uV, max_uV);
+
+Where min_uV and max_uV are the minimum and maximum acceptable voltages in
+microvolts.
+
+NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called
+when enabled, then the voltage changes instantly, otherwise the voltage
+configuration changes and the voltage is physically set when the regulator is
+next enabled.
+
+The regulators configured voltage output can be found by calling :-
+
+int regulator_get_voltage(regulator);
+
+NOTE: get_voltage() will return the configured output voltage whether the
+regulator is enabled or disabled and should NOT be used to determine regulator
+output state. However this can be used in conjunction with is_enabled() to
+determine the regulator physical output voltage.
+
+
+4. Regulator Current Limit Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
+===========================================================
+
+Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply
+current limit to match system operating points. e.g. LCD backlight driver can
+change the current limit to vary the backlight brightness, USB drivers may want
+to set the limit to 500mA when supplying power.
+
+Consumers can control their supply current limit by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_current_limit(regulator, min_uV, max_uV);
+
+Where min_uA and max_uA are the minimum and maximum acceptable current limit in
+microamps.
+
+NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called
+when enabled, then the current limit changes instantly, otherwise the current
+limit configuration changes and the current limit is physically set when the
+regulator is next enabled.
+
+A regulators current limit can be found by calling :-
+
+int regulator_get_current_limit(regulator);
+
+NOTE: get_current_limit() will return the current limit whether the regulator
+is enabled or disabled and should not be used to determine regulator current
+load.
+
+
+5. Regulator Operating Mode Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
+=============================================================
+
+Some consumers can further save system power by changing the operating mode of
+their supply regulator to be more efficient when the consumers operating state
+changes. e.g. consumer driver is idle and subsequently draws less current
+
+Regulator operating mode can be changed indirectly or directly.
+
+Indirect operating mode control.
+--------------------------------
+Consumer drivers can request a change in their supply regulator operating mode
+by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_optimum_mode(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA);
+
+This will cause the core to recalculate the total load on the regulator (based
+on all it's consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted)
+to best match the current operating load.
+
+The load_uA value can be determined from the consumers datasheet. e.g.most
+datasheets have tables showing the max current consumed in certain situations.
+
+Most consumers will use indirect operating mode control since they have no
+knowledge of the regulator or whether the regulator is shared with other
+consumers.
+
+Direct operating mode control.
+------------------------------
+Bespoke or tightly coupled drivers may want to directly control regulator
+operating mode depending on their operating point. This can be achieved by
+calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_mode(struct regulator *regulator, unsigned int mode);
+unsigned int regulator_get_mode(struct regulator *regulator);
+
+Direct mode will only be used by consumers that *know* about the regulator and
+are not sharing the regulator with other consumers.
+
+
+6. Regulator Events
+===================
+Regulators can notify consumers of external events. Events could be received by
+consumers under regulator stress or failure conditions.
+
+Consumers can register interest in regulator events by calling :-
+
+int regulator_register_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
+                              struct notifier_block *nb);
+
+Consumers can uregister interest by calling :-
+
+int regulator_unregister_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
+                                struct notifier_block *nb);
+
+Regulators use the kernel notifier framework to send event to thier interested
+consumers.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c9a35665cf70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+Regulator Machine Driver Interface
+===================================
+
+The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific
+initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that
+machine drivers would do are :-
+
+ 1. Regulator -> Device mapping.
+ 2. Regulator supply configuration.
+ 3. Power Domain constraint setting.
+
+
+
+1. Regulator -> device mapping
+==============================
+Consider the following machine :-
+
+  Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
+               |
+               +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
+
+The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in
+order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine
+initialisation code by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev,
+                                const char *supply);
+
+and is shown with the following code :-
+
+regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc");
+regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc");
+
+This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2
+to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A.
+
+
+2. Regulator supply configuration.
+==================================
+Consider the following machine (again) :-
+
+  Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
+               |
+               +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
+
+Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered
+with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's
+supply (Regulator-2).
+
+This relationship can be register with the core via :-
+
+int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply);
+
+In this example we would use the following code :-
+
+regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1");
+
+Relationships can be queried by calling :-
+
+const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator);
+
+
+3. Power Domain constraint setting.
+===================================
+Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and
+current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always
+operated within specifications.
+
+Consider the following machine (again) :-
+
+  Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
+               |
+               +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
+
+This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
+
+                   Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
+                   Domain 2: Consumer A.
+
+Constraints can be registered by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator,
+        struct regulation_constraints *constraints);
+
+The example is defined as follows :-
+
+struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = {
+        .min_uV = 3300000,
+        .max_uV = 3300000,
+        .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
+};
+
+struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = {
+        .min_uV = 1800000,
+        .max_uV = 2000000,
+        .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE,
+        .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
+};
+
+regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1);
+regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bdcb332bd7fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+Linux voltage and current regulator framework
+=============================================
+
+About
+=====
+
+This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control
+voltage and current regulators.
+
+The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control regulator power output
+in order to save power and prolong battery life. This applies to both voltage
+regulators (where voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where
+current limit is controllable).
+
+(C) 2008  Wolfson Microelectronics PLC.
+Author: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+
+
+Nomenclature
+============
+
+Some terms used in this document:-
+
+  o Regulator    - Electronic device that supplies power to other devices.
+                   Most regulators can enable and disable their output whilst
+                   some can control their output voltage and or current.
+
+                   Input Voltage -> Regulator -> Output Voltage
+
+
+  o PMIC         - Power Management IC. An IC that contains numerous regulators
+                   and often contains other susbsystems.
+
+
+  o Consumer     - Electronic device that is supplied power by a regulator.
+                   Consumers can be classified into two types:-
+
+                   Static: consumer does not change it's supply voltage or
+                   current limit. It only needs to enable or disable it's
+                   power supply. It's supply voltage is set by the hardware,
+                   bootloader, firmware or kernel board initialisation code.
+
+                   Dynamic: consumer needs to change it's supply voltage or
+                   current limit to meet operation demands.
+
+
+  o Power Domain - Electronic circuit that is supplied it's input power by the
+                   output power of a regulator, switch or by another power
+                   domain.
+
+                   The supply regulator may be behind a switch(s). i.e.
+
+                   Regulator -+-> Switch-1 -+-> Switch-2 --> [Consumer A]
+                              |             |
+                              |             +-> [Consumer B], [Consumer C]
+                              |
+                              +-> [Consumer D], [Consumer E]
+
+                   That is one regulator and three power domains:
+
+                   Domain 1: Switch-1, Consumers D & E.
+                   Domain 2: Switch-2, Consumers B & C.
+                   Domain 3: Consumer A.
+
+                   and this represents a "supplies" relationship:
+
+                   Domain-1 --> Domain-2 --> Domain-3.
+
+                   A power domain may have regulators that are supplied power
+                   by other regulators. i.e.
+
+                   Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 -+-> [Consumer A]
+                                |
+                                +-> [Consumer B]
+
+                   This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
+
+                   Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
+                   Domain 2: Consumer A.
+
+                   and a "supplies" relationship:
+
+                   Domain-1 --> Domain-2
+
+
+  o Constraints  - Constraints are used to define power levels for performance
+                   and hardware protection. Constraints exist at three levels:
+
+                   Regulator Level: This is defined by the regulator hardware
+                   operating parameters and is specified in the regulator
+                   datasheet. i.e.
+
+                     - voltage output is in the range 800mV -> 3500mV.
+                     - regulator current output limit is 20mA @ 5V but is
+                       10mA @ 10V.
+
+                   Power Domain Level: This is defined in software by kernel
+                   level board initialisation code. It is used to constrain a
+                   power domain to a particular power range. i.e.
+
+                     - Domain-1 voltage is 3300mV
+                     - Domain-2 voltage is 1400mV -> 1600mV
+                     - Domain-3 current limit is 0mA -> 20mA.
+
+                   Consumer Level: This is defined by consumer drivers
+                   dynamically setting voltage or current limit levels.
+
+                   e.g. a consumer backlight driver asks for a current increase
+                   from 5mA to 10mA to increase LCD illumination. This passes
+                   to through the levels as follows :-
+
+                   Consumer: need to increase LCD brightness. Lookup and
+                   request next current mA value in brightness table (the
+                   consumer driver could be used on several different
+                   personalities based upon the same reference device).
+
+                   Power Domain: is the new current limit within the domain
+                   operating limits for this domain and system state (e.g.
+                   battery power, USB power)
+
+                   Regulator Domains: is the new current limit within the
+                   regulator operating parameters for input/ouput voltage.
+
+                   If the regulator request passes all the constraint tests
+                   then the new regulator value is applied.
+
+
+Design
+======
+
+The framework is designed and targeted at SoC based devices but may also be
+relevant to non SoC devices and is split into the following four interfaces:-
+
+
+   1. Consumer driver interface.
+
+      This uses a similar API to the kernel clock interface in that consumer
+      drivers can get and put a regulator (like they can with clocks atm) and
+      get/set voltage, current limit, mode, enable and disable. This should
+      allow consumers complete control over their supply voltage and current
+      limit. This also compiles out if not in use so drivers can be reused in
+      systems with no regulator based power control.
+
+        See Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
+
+   2. Regulator driver interface.
+
+      This allows regulator drivers to register their regulators and provide
+      operations to the core. It also has a notifier call chain for propagating
+      regulator events to clients.
+
+        See Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+   3. Machine interface.
+
+      This interface is for machine specific code and allows the creation of
+      voltage/current domains (with constraints) for each regulator. It can
+      provide regulator constraints that will prevent device damage through
+      overvoltage or over current caused by buggy client drivers. It also
+      allows the creation of a regulator tree whereby some regulators are
+      supplied by others (similar to a clock tree).
+
+        See Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
+
+   4. Userspace ABI.
+
+      The framework also exports a lot of useful voltage/current/opmode data to
+      userspace via sysfs. This could be used to help monitor device power
+      consumption and status.
+
+        See Documentation/ABI/testing/regulator-sysfs.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a69050143592
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Regulator Driver Interface
+==========================
+
+The regulator driver interface is relatively simple and designed to allow
+regulator drivers to register their services with the core framework.
+
+
+Registration
+============
+
+Drivers can register a regulator by calling :-
+
+struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc,
+                                          void *reg_data);
+
+This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator
+core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver).
+
+Regulators can be unregistered by calling :-
+
+void regulator_unregister(struct regulator_dev *rdev);
+
+
+Regulator Events
+================
+Regulators can send events (e.g. over temp, under voltage, etc) to consumer
+drivers by calling :-
+
+int regulator_notifier_call_chain(struct regulator_dev *rdev,
+                                  unsigned long event, void *data);
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
index 3be84aa38dfe..29d839ce7327 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
@@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
         - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
 ppc_htab.txt
         - info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry
-SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
-        - EST SBC8260 board info
 smp.txt
         - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines
 sound.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e6e9ee0506c3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,197 +0,0 @@
-Please mail me (Jon Diekema, diekema_jon@si.com or diekema@cideas.com)
-if you have questions, comments or corrections.
-
-        * EST SBC8260 Linux memory mapping rules
-
-        http://www.estc.com/ 
-        http://www.estc.com/products/boards/SBC8260-8240_ds.html
-
-        Initial conditions:
-        -------------------
-        
-        Tasks that need to be perform by the boot ROM before control is
-        transferred to zImage (compressed Linux kernel):
-
-        - Define the IMMR to 0xf0000000
-
-        - Initialize the memory controller so that RAM is available at
-          physical address 0x00000000.  On the SBC8260 is this 16M (64M)
-          SDRAM.
-
-        - The boot ROM should only clear the RAM that it is using.
-
-          The reason for doing this is to enhances the chances of a
-          successful post mortem on a Linux panic.  One of the first
-          items to examine is the 16k (LOG_BUF_LEN) circular console
-          buffer called log_buf which is defined in kernel/printk.c.
-
-        - To enhance boot ROM performance, the I-cache can be enabled.
-
-          Date: Mon, 22 May 2000 14:21:10 -0700
-          From: Neil Russell <caret@c-side.com>
-
-          LiMon (LInux MONitor) runs with and starts Linux with MMU
-          off, I-cache enabled, D-cache disabled.  The I-cache doesn't
-          need hints from the MMU to work correctly as the D-cache
-          does.  No D-cache means no special code to handle devices in
-          the presence of cache (no snooping, etc). The use of the
-          I-cache means that the monitor can run acceptably fast
-          directly from ROM, rather than having to copy it to RAM.
-
-        - Build the board information structure (see 
-          include/asm-ppc/est8260.h for its definition)
-
-        - The compressed Linux kernel (zImage) contains a bootstrap loader 
-          that is position independent; you can load it into any RAM, 
-          ROM or FLASH memory address >= 0x00500000 (above 5 MB), or
-          at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB).
-
-          Note: If zImage is loaded at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB),
-                then zImage will skip the step of moving itself to 
-                its link address.
-
-        - Load R3 with the address of the board information structure
-
-        - Transfer control to zImage
-
-        - The Linux console port is SMC1, and the baud rate is controlled
-          from the bi_baudrate field of the board information structure.
-          On thing to keep in mind when picking the baud rate, is that
-          there is no flow control on the SMC ports.  I would stick
-          with something safe and standard like 19200.
-
-          On the EST SBC8260, the SMC1 port is on the COM1 connector of
-          the board.
-
-        
-        EST SBC8260 defaults:
-        ---------------------
-
-                                Chip
-        Memory                  Sel  Bus   Use
-        ---------------------   ---  ---   ----------------------------------
-        0x00000000-0x03FFFFFF   CS2  60x   (16M or 64M)/64M SDRAM
-        0x04000000-0x04FFFFFF   CS4  local  4M/16M SDRAM (soldered to the board)
-        0x21000000-0x21000000   CS7  60x    1B/64K Flash present detect (from the flash SIMM)
-        0x21000001-0x21000001   CS7  60x    1B/64K Switches (read) and LEDs (write)
-        0x22000000-0x2200FFFF   CS5  60x    8K/64K EEPROM
-        0xFC000000-0xFCFFFFFF   CS6  60x    2M/16M flash (8 bits wide, soldered to the board)
-        0xFE000000-0xFFFFFFFF   CS0  60x    4M/16M flash (SIMM)
-
-        Notes:
-        ------
-
-        - The chip selects can map 32K blocks and up (powers of 2)
-
-        - The SDRAM machine can handled up to 128Mbytes per chip select
-
-        - Linux uses the 60x bus memory (the SDRAM DIMM) for the 
-          communications buffers.
-
-        - BATs can map 128K-256Mbytes each.  There are four data BATs and
-          four instruction BATs.  Generally the data and instruction BATs
-          are mapped the same.
-
-        - The IMMR must be set above the kernel virtual memory addresses,
-          which start at 0xC0000000.  Otherwise, the kernel may crash as
-          soon as you start any threads or processes due to VM collisions 
-          in the kernel or user process space.
-
-
-          Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 10/29/1999:
-
-          The user application virtual space consumes the first 2 Gbytes
-          (0x00000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF).  The kernel virtual text starts at
-          0xC0000000, with data following.  There is a "protection hole"
-          between the end of kernel data and the start of the kernel
-          dynamically allocated space, but this space is still within
-          0xCxxxxxxx.
-
-          Obviously the kernel can't map any physical addresses 1:1 in
-          these ranges.
-
-
-          Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 5/19/2000:
-
-          During the early kernel initialization, the kernel virtual
-          memory allocator is not operational.  Prior to this KVM
-          initialization, we choose to map virtual to physical addresses
-          1:1.  That is, the kernel virtual address exactly matches the
-          physical address on the bus.  These mappings are typically done
-          in arch/ppc/kernel/head.S, or arch/ppc/mm/init.c.  Only
-          absolutely necessary mappings should be done at this time, for
-          example board control registers or a serial uart.  Normal device
-          driver initialization should map resources later when necessary.
-
-          Although platform dependent, and certainly the case for embedded
-          8xx, traditionally memory is mapped at physical address zero,
-          and I/O devices above physical address 0x80000000.  The lowest
-          and highest (above 0xf0000000) I/O addresses are traditionally 
-          used for devices or registers we need to map during kernel 
-          initialization and prior to KVM operation.  For this reason, 
-          and since it followed prior PowerPC platform examples, I chose 
-          to map the embedded 8xx kernel to the 0xc0000000 virtual address.
-          This way, we can enable the MMU to map the kernel for proper 
-          operation, and still map a few windows before the KVM is operational.
-
-          On some systems, you could possibly run the kernel at the 
-          0x80000000 or any other virtual address.  It just depends upon 
-          mapping that must be done prior to KVM operational.  You can never 
-          map devices or kernel spaces that overlap with the user virtual 
-          space.  This is why default IMMR mapping used by most BDM tools 
-          won't work.  They put the IMMR at something like 0x10000000 or 
-          0x02000000 for example.  You simply can't map these addresses early
-          in the kernel, and continue proper system operation.
-
-          The embedded 8xx/82xx kernel is mature enough that all you should 
-          need to do is map the IMMR someplace at or above 0xf0000000 and it 
-          should boot far enough to get serial console messages and KGDB 
-          connected on any platform.  There are lots of other subtle memory 
-          management design features that you simply don't need to worry 
-          about.  If you are changing functions related to MMU initialization,
-          you are likely breaking things that are known to work and are 
-          heading down a path of disaster and frustration.  Your changes 
-          should be to make the flexibility of the processor fit Linux, 
-          not force arbitrary and non-workable memory mappings into Linux.
-
-        - You don't want to change KERNELLOAD or KERNELBASE, otherwise the
-          virtual memory and MMU code will get confused.
-        
-          arch/ppc/Makefile:KERNELLOAD = 0xc0000000
-
-          include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define PAGE_OFFSET    0xc0000000
-          include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define KERNELBASE     PAGE_OFFSET
-
-        - RAM is at physical address 0x00000000, and gets mapped to 
-          virtual address 0xC0000000 for the kernel.
-
-
-        Physical addresses used by the Linux kernel:
-        --------------------------------------------
-
-        0x00000000-0x3FFFFFFF   1GB reserved for RAM
-        0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF   128K IMMR  64K used for dual port memory,
-                                 64K for 8260 registers
-
-        
-        Logical addresses used by the Linux kernel:
-        -------------------------------------------
-
-        0xF0000000-0xFFFFFFFF   256M BAT0 (IMMR: dual port RAM, registers)
-        0xE0000000-0xEFFFFFFF   256M BAT1 (I/O space for custom boards)
-        0xC0000000-0xCFFFFFFF   256M BAT2 (RAM)
-        0xD0000000-0xDFFFFFFF   256M BAT3 (if RAM > 256MByte)
-
-
-        EST SBC8260 Linux mapping:
-        --------------------------
-
-        DBAT0, IBAT0, cache inhibited:
-
-                                Chip
-        Memory                  Sel  Use
-        ---------------------   ---  ---------------------------------
-        0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF   n/a  IMMR: dual port RAM, registers
-
-        DBAT1, IBAT1, cache inhibited:
-
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
index aee243a846a2..de4063cb4fdc 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -59,6 +59,7 @@ Table of Contents
       p) Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface
           q) USB EHCI controllers
       r) MDIO on GPIOs
+      s) SPI busses
 
   VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips
     1) The /system-controller node
@@ -89,10 +90,12 @@ Table of Contents
     3) OpenPIC Interrupt Controllers
     4) ISA Interrupt Controllers
 
-  VIII - Specifying GPIO information for devices
+  IX - Specifying GPIO information for devices
     1) gpios property
     2) gpio-controller nodes
 
+  X - Specifying device power management information (sleep property)
+
   Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 
 
@@ -275,7 +278,7 @@ it with special cases.
         a 64-bit platform.
 
         d) request and get assigned a platform number (see PLATFORM_*
-        constants in include/asm-powerpc/processor.h
+        constants in arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h
 
 32-bit embedded kernels:
 
@@ -337,7 +340,7 @@ the block to RAM before passing it to the kernel.
 ---------
 
    The kernel is entered with r3 pointing to an area of memory that is
-   roughly described in include/asm-powerpc/prom.h by the structure
+   roughly described in arch/powerpc/include/asm/prom.h by the structure
    boot_param_header:
 
 struct boot_param_header {
@@ -705,7 +708,7 @@ device or bus to be described by the device tree.
 In general, the format of an address for a device is defined by the
 parent bus type, based on the #address-cells and #size-cells
 properties.  Note that the parent's parent definitions of #address-cells
-and #size-cells are not inhereted so every node with children must specify
+and #size-cells are not inherited so every node with children must specify
 them.  The kernel requires the root node to have those properties defining
 addresses format for devices directly mapped on the processor bus.
 
@@ -1774,7 +1777,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 
       Xilinx uartlite devices are simple fixed speed serial ports.
 
-      Requred properties:
+      Required properties:
        - current-speed : Baud rate of uartlite
 
       v) Xilinx hwicap
@@ -1796,7 +1799,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
       Xilinx UART 16550 devices are very similar to the NS16550 but with
       different register spacing and an offset from the base address.
 
-      Requred properties:
+      Required properties:
        - clock-frequency : Frequency of the clock input
        - reg-offset : A value of 3 is required
        - reg-shift : A value of 2 is required
@@ -1881,6 +1884,62 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
                          &qe_pio_c 6>;
         };
 
+    s) SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) busses
+
+    SPI busses can be described with a node for the SPI master device
+    and a set of child nodes for each SPI slave on the bus.  For this
+    discussion, it is assumed that the system's SPI controller is in
+    SPI master mode.  This binding does not describe SPI controllers
+    in slave mode.
+
+    The SPI master node requires the following properties:
+    - #address-cells  - number of cells required to define a chip select
+                        address on the SPI bus.
+    - #size-cells     - should be zero.
+    - compatible      - name of SPI bus controller following generic names
+                        recommended practice.
+    No other properties are required in the SPI bus node.  It is assumed
+    that a driver for an SPI bus device will understand that it is an SPI bus.
+    However, the binding does not attempt to define the specific method for
+    assigning chip select numbers.  Since SPI chip select configuration is
+    flexible and non-standardized, it is left out of this binding with the
+    assumption that board specific platform code will be used to manage
+    chip selects.  Individual drivers can define additional properties to
+    support describing the chip select layout.
+
+    SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can
+    contain the following properties.
+    - reg             - (required) chip select address of device.
+    - compatible      - (required) name of SPI device following generic names
+                        recommended practice
+    - spi-max-frequency - (required) Maximum SPI clocking speed of device in Hz
+    - spi-cpol        - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires
+                        inverse clock polarity (CPOL) mode
+    - spi-cpha        - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires
+                        shifted clock phase (CPHA) mode
+
+    SPI example for an MPC5200 SPI bus:
+                spi@f00 {
+                        #address-cells = <1>;
+                        #size-cells = <0>;
+                        compatible = "fsl,mpc5200b-spi","fsl,mpc5200-spi";
+                        reg = <0xf00 0x20>;
+                        interrupts = <2 13 0 2 14 0>;
+                        interrupt-parent = <&mpc5200_pic>;
+
+                        ethernet-switch@0 {
+                                compatible = "micrel,ks8995m";
+                                spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
+                                reg = <0>;
+                        };
+
+                        codec@1 {
+                                compatible = "ti,tlv320aic26";
+                                spi-max-frequency = <100000>;
+                                reg = <1>;
+                        };
+                };
+
 VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips
 ===========================================================
 
@@ -1894,7 +1953,7 @@ prefixed with the string "marvell,", for Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
 1) The /system-controller node
 
   This node is used to represent the system-controller and must be
-  present when the system uses a system contller chip. The top-level
+  present when the system uses a system controller chip. The top-level
   system-controller node contains information that is global to all
   devices within the system controller chip. The node name begins
   with "system-controller" followed by the unit address, which is
@@ -2488,8 +2547,8 @@ encodings listed below:
         2 =  high to low edge sensitive type enabled
         3 =  low to high edge sensitive type enabled
 
-VIII - Specifying GPIO information for devices
-==============================================
+IX - Specifying GPIO information for devices
+============================================
 
 1) gpios property
 -----------------
@@ -2537,116 +2596,151 @@ Example of two SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes:
                 gpio-controller;
         };
 
+X - Specifying Device Power Management Information (sleep property)
+===================================================================
+
+Devices on SOCs often have mechanisms for placing devices into low-power
+states that are decoupled from the devices' own register blocks.  Sometimes,
+this information is more complicated than a cell-index property can
+reasonably describe.  Thus, each device controlled in such a manner
+may contain a "sleep" property which describes these connections.
+
+The sleep property consists of one or more sleep resources, each of
+which consists of a phandle to a sleep controller, followed by a
+controller-specific sleep specifier of zero or more cells.
+
+The semantics of what type of low power modes are possible are defined
+by the sleep controller.  Some examples of the types of low power modes
+that may be supported are:
+
+ - Dynamic: The device may be disabled or enabled at any time.
+ - System Suspend: The device may request to be disabled or remain
+   awake during system suspend, but will not be disabled until then.
+ - Permanent: The device is disabled permanently (until the next hard
+   reset).
+
+Some devices may share a clock domain with each other, such that they should
+only be suspended when none of the devices are in use.  Where reasonable,
+such nodes should be placed on a virtual bus, where the bus has the sleep
+property.  If the clock domain is shared among devices that cannot be
+reasonably grouped in this manner, then create a virtual sleep controller
+(similar to an interrupt nexus, except that defining a standardized
+sleep-map should wait until its necessity is demonstrated).
+
 Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 ========================================
 
-Note that the #address-cells and #size-cells for the SoC node
-in this example have been explicitly listed; these are likely
-not necessary as they are usually the same as the root node.
-
-        soc8540@e0000000 {
+        soc@e0000000 {
                 #address-cells = <1>;
                 #size-cells = <1>;
-                #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-ccsr", "simple-bus";
                 device_type = "soc";
-                ranges = <00000000 e0000000 00100000>
-                reg = <e0000000 00003000>;
+                ranges = <0x00000000 0xe0000000 0x00100000>
                 bus-frequency = <0>;
-
-                mdio@24520 {
-                        reg = <24520 20>;
-                        device_type = "mdio";
-                        compatible = "gianfar";
-
-                        ethernet-phy@0 {
-                                linux,phandle = <2452000>
-                                interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                                interrupts = <35 1>;
-                                reg = <0>;
-                                device_type = "ethernet-phy";
-                        };
-
-                        ethernet-phy@1 {
-                                linux,phandle = <2452001>
-                                interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                                interrupts = <35 1>;
-                                reg = <1>;
-                                device_type = "ethernet-phy";
-                        };
-
-                        ethernet-phy@3 {
-                                linux,phandle = <2452002>
-                                interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                                interrupts = <35 1>;
-                                reg = <3>;
-                                device_type = "ethernet-phy";
-                        };
-
-                };
+                interrupt-parent = <&pic>;
 
                 ethernet@24000 {
-                        #size-cells = <0>;
+                        #address-cells = <1>;
+                        #size-cells = <1>;
                         device_type = "network";
                         model = "TSEC";
-                        compatible = "gianfar";
-                        reg = <24000 1000>;
-                        mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
-                        interrupts = <d 3 e 3 12 3>;
-                        interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                        phy-handle = <2452000>;
+                        compatible = "gianfar", "simple-bus";
+                        reg = <0x24000 0x1000>;
+                        local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
+                        interrupts = <29 2 30 2 34 2>;
+                        phy-handle = <&phy0>;
+                        sleep = <&pmc 00000080>;
+                        ranges;
+
+                        mdio@24520 {
+                                reg = <0x24520 0x20>;
+                                compatible = "fsl,gianfar-mdio";
+
+                                phy0: ethernet-phy@0 {
+                                        interrupts = <5 1>;
+                                        reg = <0>;
+                                        device_type = "ethernet-phy";
+                                };
+
+                                phy1: ethernet-phy@1 {
+                                        interrupts = <5 1>;
+                                        reg = <1>;
+                                        device_type = "ethernet-phy";
+                                };
+
+                                phy3: ethernet-phy@3 {
+                                        interrupts = <7 1>;
+                                        reg = <3>;
+                                        device_type = "ethernet-phy";
+                                };
+                        };
                 };
 
                 ethernet@25000 {
-                        #address-cells = <1>;
-                        #size-cells = <0>;
                         device_type = "network";
                         model = "TSEC";
                         compatible = "gianfar";
-                        reg = <25000 1000>;
-                        mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 01 ];
-                        interrupts = <13 3 14 3 18 3>;
-                        interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                        phy-handle = <2452001>;
+                        reg = <0x25000 0x1000>;
+                        local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 01 ];
+                        interrupts = <13 2 14 2 18 2>;
+                        phy-handle = <&phy1>;
+                        sleep = <&pmc 00000040>;
                 };
 
                 ethernet@26000 {
-                        #address-cells = <1>;
-                        #size-cells = <0>;
                         device_type = "network";
                         model = "FEC";
                         compatible = "gianfar";
-                        reg = <26000 1000>;
-                        mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 02 ];
-                        interrupts = <19 3>;
-                        interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                        phy-handle = <2452002>;
+                        reg = <0x26000 0x1000>;
+                        local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 02 ];
+                        interrupts = <41 2>;
+                        phy-handle = <&phy3>;
+                        sleep = <&pmc 00000020>;
                 };
 
                 serial@4500 {
-                        device_type = "serial";
-                        compatible = "ns16550";
-                        reg = <4500 100>;
-                        clock-frequency = <0>;
-                        interrupts = <1a 3>;
-                        interrupt-parent = <40000>;
+                        #address-cells = <1>;
+                        #size-cells = <1>;
+                        compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-duart", "simple-bus";
+                        sleep = <&pmc 00000002>;
+                        ranges;
+
+                        serial@4500 {
+                                device_type = "serial";
+                                compatible = "ns16550";
+                                reg = <0x4500 0x100>;
+                                clock-frequency = <0>;
+                                interrupts = <42 2>;
+                        };
+
+                        serial@4600 {
+                                device_type = "serial";
+                                compatible = "ns16550";
+                                reg = <0x4600 0x100>;
+                                clock-frequency = <0>;
+                                interrupts = <42 2>;
+                        };
                 };
 
-                pic@40000 {
-                        linux,phandle = <40000>;
+                pic: pic@40000 {
                         interrupt-controller;
                         #address-cells = <0>;
-                        reg = <40000 40000>;
+                        #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+                        reg = <0x40000 0x40000>;
                         compatible = "chrp,open-pic";
                         device_type = "open-pic";
                 };
 
                 i2c@3000 {
-                        interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                        interrupts = <1b 3>;
-                        reg = <3000 18>;
-                        device_type = "i2c";
+                        interrupts = <43 2>;
+                        reg = <0x3000 0x100>;
                         compatible  = "fsl-i2c";
                         dfsrr;
+                        sleep = <&pmc 00000004>;
                 };
 
+                pmc: power@e0070 {
+                        compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-pmc", "fsl,mpc8548-pmc";
+                        reg = <0xe0070 0x20>;
+                };
         };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1815dfede1bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined,
+this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers.
+
+On CPM1 devices, all ports are using slightly different register layouts.
+Ports A, C and D are 16bit ports and Ports B and E are 32bit ports.
+
+On CPM2 devices, all ports are 32bit ports and use a common register layout.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-a", "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-b",
+  "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-c", "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-d",
+  "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-e", "fsl,cpm2-pario-bank"
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional paramters (currently unused).
+- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller.
+
+Example of three SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes:
+
+        CPM1_PIO_A: gpio-controller@950 {
+                #gpio-cells = <2>;
+                compatible = "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-a";
+                reg = <0x950 0x10>;
+                gpio-controller;
+        };
+
+        CPM1_PIO_B: gpio-controller@ab8 {
+                #gpio-cells = <2>;
+                compatible = "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-b";
+                reg = <0xab8 0x10>;
+                gpio-controller;
+        };
+
+        CPM1_PIO_E: gpio-controller@ac8 {
+                #gpio-cells = <2>;
+                compatible = "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-e";
+                reg = <0xac8 0x18>;
+                gpio-controller;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt
index c8f44d6bcbcf..9ccd5f30405b 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,37 @@
-* USB (Universal Serial Bus Controller)
+Freescale QUICC Engine USB Controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : could be "qe_udc" or "fhci-hcd".
-- mode : the could be "host" or "slave".
-- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
-- interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
-  field that represents an encoding of the sense and level
-  information for the interrupt.  This should be encoded based on
-  the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt
-  controller you have.
-- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
-  services interrupts for this device.
+- compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-qe-usb", "fsl,mpc8323-qe-usb".
+- reg : the first two cells should contain usb registers location and
+  length, the next two two cells should contain PRAM location and
+  length.
+- interrupts : should contain USB interrupt.
+- interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle.
+- fsl,fullspeed-clock : specifies the full speed USB clock source:
+  "none": clock source is disabled
+  "brg1" through "brg16": clock source is BRG1-BRG16, respectively
+  "clk1" through "clk24": clock source is CLK1-CLK24, respectively
+- fsl,lowspeed-clock : specifies the low speed USB clock source:
+  "none": clock source is disabled
+  "brg1" through "brg16": clock source is BRG1-BRG16, respectively
+  "clk1" through "clk24": clock source is CLK1-CLK24, respectively
+- hub-power-budget : USB power budget for the root hub, in mA.
+- gpios : should specify GPIOs in this order: USBOE, USBTP, USBTN, USBRP,
+  USBRN, SPEED (optional), and POWER (optional).
 
-Example(slave):
-        usb@6c0 {
-                compatible = "qe_udc";
-                reg = <6c0 40>;
-                interrupts = <8b 0>;
-                interrupt-parent = <700>;
-                mode = "slave";
-        };
+Example:
+
+usb@6c0 {
+        compatible = "fsl,mpc8360-qe-usb", "fsl,mpc8323-qe-usb";
+        reg = <0x6c0 0x40 0x8b00 0x100>;
+        interrupts = <11>;
+        interrupt-parent = <&qeic>;
+        fsl,fullspeed-clock = "clk21";
+        gpios = <&qe_pio_b  2 0 /* USBOE */
+                 &qe_pio_b  3 0 /* USBTP */
+                 &qe_pio_b  8 0 /* USBTN */
+                 &qe_pio_b  9 0 /* USBRP */
+                 &qe_pio_b 11 0 /* USBRN */
+                 &qe_pio_e 20 0 /* SPEED */
+                 &qe_pio_e 21 0 /* POWER */>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt
index b35f3482e3e4..2ea76d9d137c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,15 @@ Currently defined compatibles:
 - fsl,cpm2-scc-uart
 - fsl,qe-uart
 
+Modem control lines connected to GPIO controllers are listed in the gpios
+property as described in booting-without-of.txt, section IX.1 in the following
+order:
+
+CTS, RTS, DCD, DSR, DTR, and RI.
+
+The gpios property is optional and can be left out when control lines are
+not used.
+
 Example:
 
         serial@11a00 {
@@ -18,4 +27,6 @@ Example:
                 interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
                 fsl,cpm-brg = <1>;
                 fsl,cpm-command = <00800000>;
+                gpios = <&gpio_c 15 0
+                         &gpio_d 29 0>;
         };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f766333b6eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Freescale MPC8349E-mITX-compatible Power Management Micro Controller Unit (MCU)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,<mcu-chip>-<board>", "fsl,mcu-mpc8349emitx".
+- reg : should specify I2C address (0x0a).
+- #gpio-cells : should be 2.
+- gpio-controller : should be present.
+
+Example:
+
+mcu@0a {
+        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+        compatible = "fsl,mc9s08qg8-mpc8349emitx",
+                     "fsl,mcu-mpc8349emitx";
+        reg = <0x0a>;
+        gpio-controller;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02f6f43ee1b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+* Power Management Controller
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,<chip>-pmc".
+
+  "fsl,mpc8349-pmc" should be listed for any chip whose PMC is
+  compatible.  "fsl,mpc8313-pmc" should also be listed for any chip
+  whose PMC is compatible, and implies deep-sleep capability.
+
+  "fsl,mpc8548-pmc" should be listed for any chip whose PMC is
+  compatible.  "fsl,mpc8536-pmc" should also be listed for any chip
+  whose PMC is compatible, and implies deep-sleep capability.
+
+  "fsl,mpc8641d-pmc" should be listed for any chip whose PMC is
+  compatible; all statements below that apply to "fsl,mpc8548-pmc" also
+  apply to "fsl,mpc8641d-pmc".
+
+  Compatibility does not include bit assigments in SCCR/PMCDR/DEVDISR; these
+  bit assigments are indicated via the sleep specifier in each device's
+  sleep property.
+
+- reg: For devices compatible with "fsl,mpc8349-pmc", the first resource
+  is the PMC block, and the second resource is the Clock Configuration
+  block.
+
+  For devices compatible with "fsl,mpc8548-pmc", the first resource
+  is a 32-byte block beginning with DEVDISR.
+
+- interrupts: For "fsl,mpc8349-pmc"-compatible devices, the first
+  resource is the PMC block interrupt.
+
+- fsl,mpc8313-wakeup-timer: For "fsl,mpc8313-pmc"-compatible devices,
+  this is a phandle to an "fsl,gtm" node on which timer 4 can be used as
+  a wakeup source from deep sleep.
+
+Sleep specifiers:
+
+  fsl,mpc8349-pmc: Sleep specifiers consist of one cell.  For each bit
+  that is set in the cell, the corresponding bit in SCCR will be saved
+  and cleared on suspend, and restored on resume.  This sleep controller
+  supports disabling and resuming devices at any time.
+
+  fsl,mpc8536-pmc: Sleep specifiers consist of three cells, the third of
+  which will be ORed into PMCDR upon suspend, and cleared from PMCDR
+  upon resume.  The first two cells are as described for fsl,mpc8578-pmc.
+  This sleep controller only supports disabling devices during system
+  sleep, or permanently.
+
+  fsl,mpc8548-pmc: Sleep specifiers consist of one or two cells, the
+  first of which will be ORed into DEVDISR (and the second into
+  DEVDISR2, if present -- this cell should be zero or absent if the
+  hardware does not have DEVDISR2) upon a request for permanent device
+  disabling.  This sleep controller does not support configuring devices
+  to disable during system sleep (unless supported by another compatible
+  match), or dynamically.
+
+Example:
+
+        power@b00 {
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8313-pmc", "fsl,mpc8349-pmc";
+                reg = <0xb00 0x100 0xa00 0x100>;
+                interrupts = <80 8>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt
index 583ef6b56c43..cf55fa4112d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt
@@ -24,46 +24,39 @@ Example:
 
 * Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes
 
-Required properties:
+Properties:
 
   - device_type : Should be "network"
   - model : Model of the device.  Can be "TSEC", "eTSEC", or "FEC"
   - compatible : Should be "gianfar"
   - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
-  - mac-address : List of bytes representing the ethernet address of
+  - local-mac-address : List of bytes representing the ethernet address of
     this controller
-  - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
-    field that represents an encoding of the sense and level
-    information for the interrupt.  This should be encoded based on
-    the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt
-    controller you have.
-  - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
-    services interrupts for this device.
+  - interrupts : For FEC devices, the first interrupt is the device's
+    interrupt.  For TSEC and eTSEC devices, the first interrupt is
+    transmit, the second is receive, and the third is error.
   - phy-handle : The phandle for the PHY connected to this ethernet
     controller.
   - fixed-link : <a b c d e> where a is emulated phy id - choose any,
     but unique to the all specified fixed-links, b is duplex - 0 half,
     1 full, c is link speed - d#10/d#100/d#1000, d is pause - 0 no
     pause, 1 pause, e is asym_pause - 0 no asym_pause, 1 asym_pause.
-
-Recommended properties:
-
   - phy-connection-type : a string naming the controller/PHY interface type,
     i.e., "mii" (default), "rmii", "gmii", "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "sgmii",
     "tbi", or "rtbi".  This property is only really needed if the connection
     is of type "rgmii-id", as all other connection types are detected by
     hardware.
-
+  - fsl,magic-packet : If present, indicates that the hardware supports
+    waking up via magic packet.
 
 Example:
         ethernet@24000 {
-                #size-cells = <0>;
                 device_type = "network";
                 model = "TSEC";
                 compatible = "gianfar";
-                reg = <24000 1000>;
-                mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
-                interrupts = <d 3 e 3 12 3>;
-                interrupt-parent = <40000>;
-                phy-handle = <2452000>
+                reg = <0x24000 0x1000>;
+                local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
+                interrupts = <29 2 30 2 34 2>;
+                interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
+                phy-handle = <&phy0>
         };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..84a04d5eb8e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Freescale Localbus UPM programmed to work with NAND flash
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,upm-nand".
+- reg : should specify localbus chip select and size used for the chip.
+- fsl,upm-addr-offset : UPM pattern offset for the address latch.
+- fsl,upm-cmd-offset : UPM pattern offset for the command latch.
+- gpios : may specify optional GPIO connected to the Ready-Not-Busy pin.
+
+Example:
+
+upm@1,0 {
+        compatible = "fsl,upm-nand";
+        reg = <1 0 1>;
+        fsl,upm-addr-offset = <16>;
+        fsl,upm-cmd-offset = <8>;
+        gpios = <&qe_pio_e 18 0>;
+
+        flash {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                compatible = "...";
+
+                partition@0 {
+                        ...
+                };
+        };
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ff51f4c0fa9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+LED connected to GPIO
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "gpio-led".
+- label : (optional) the label for this LED. If omitted, the label is
+  taken from the node name (excluding the unit address).
+- gpios : should specify LED GPIO.
+
+Example:
+
+led@0 {
+        compatible = "gpio-led";
+        label = "hdd";
+        gpios = <&mcu_pio 0 1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
index df7afe43d462..9d4e33df624c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ error.  Given an arbitrary address, the routine
 pci_get_device_by_addr() will find the pci device associated
 with that address (if any).
 
-The default include/asm-powerpc/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(),
+The default arch/powerpc/include/asm/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(),
 etc. include a check to see if the i/o read returned all-0xff's.
 If so, these make a call to eeh_dn_check_failure(), which in turn
 asks the firmware if the all-ff's value is the sign of a true EEH
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
index 896266432d33..06da4d4b44f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Although it is not recommended, you can specify '0' in the soc.model
 field to skip matching SOCs altogether.
 
 The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The
-'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbrs,
+'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbers,
 respectively, of the SOC.
 
 For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0:
diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
index 0843ed0163a5..6fcb3060dec5 100644
--- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
@@ -363,6 +363,11 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set,
 when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill
 line.
 
+5. During suspend, the rfkill class will attempt to soft-block the radio
+through a call to rfkill->toggle_radio, and will try to restore its previous
+state during resume.  After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call
+rfkill->toggle_radio until it is resumed.
+
 Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem:
 --------------------------------------------------------------------
 
@@ -390,9 +395,10 @@ rfkill lines are inactive, it must return RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED if its soft
 rfkill input line is active.  Only if none of the rfkill input lines are
 active, will it return RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED.
 
-If it doesn't implement the get_state() hook, it must make sure that its calls
-to rfkill_force_state() are enough to keep the status always up-to-date, and it
-must do a rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep.
+Since the device has a hardware rfkill line, it IS subject to state changes
+external to rfkill.  Therefore, the driver must make sure that it calls
+rfkill_force_state() to keep the status always up-to-date, and it must do a
+rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep.
 
 Every time the driver gets a notification from the card that one of its rfkill
 lines changed state (polling might be needed on badly designed cards that don't
@@ -422,13 +428,24 @@ of the hardware is unknown), or read-write (where the hardware can be queried
 about its current state).
 
 The rfkill class will call the get_state hook of a device every time it needs
-to know the *real* current state of the hardware.  This can happen often.
+to know the *real* current state of the hardware.  This can happen often, but
+it does not do any polling, so it is not enough on hardware that is subject
+to state changes outside of the rfkill subsystem.
+
+Therefore, calling rfkill_force_state() when a state change happens is
+mandatory when the device has a hardware rfkill line, or when something else
+like the firmware could cause its state to be changed without going through the
+rfkill class.
 
 Some hardware provides events when its status changes.  In these cases, it is
 best for the driver to not provide a get_state hook, and instead register the
 rfkill class *already* with the correct status, and keep it updated using
 rfkill_force_state() when it gets an event from the hardware.
 
+rfkill_force_state() must be used on the device resume handlers to update the
+rfkill status, should there be any chance of the device status changing during
+the sleep.
+
 There is no provision for a statically-allocated rfkill struct.  You must
 use rfkill_allocate() to allocate one.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
index e938c442277d..bde473df748d 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ device 4711 via subchannel 1 in subchannel set 0, and subchannel 2 is a non-I/O
 subchannel. Device 1234 is accessed via subchannel 0 in subchannel set 1.
 
 The subchannel named 'defunct' does not represent any real subchannel on the
-system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnnected ccw devices are moved to
+system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnected ccw devices are moved to
 if they are displaced by another ccw device becoming operational on their
 former subchannel. The ccw devices will be moved again to a proper subchannel
 if they become operational again on that subchannel.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
index 716fcc1cafb5..c851ef497795 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
@@ -1,3 +1,26 @@
+
+1 Release Date    : Thur.July. 24 11:41:51 PST 2008 -
+                       (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+                       Sumant Patro
+                       Bo Yang
+
+2 Current Version : 00.00.04.01
+3 Older Version   : 00.00.03.22
+
+1. Add the new controller (0078, 0079) support to the driver
+       Those controllers are LSI's next generatation(gen2) SAS controllers.
+
+1 Release Date    : Mon.June. 23 10:12:45 PST 2008 -
+                       (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+                       Sumant Patro
+                       Bo Yang
+
+2 Current Version : 00.00.03.22
+3 Older Version   : 00.00.03.20
+
+1. Add shutdown DCMD cmd to the shutdown routine to make FW shutdown proper.
+2. Unexpected interrupt occurs in HWR Linux driver, add the dumy readl pci flush will fix this issue.
+
 1 Release Date    : Mon. March 10 11:02:31 PDT 2008 -
                         (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
                         Sumant Patro
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
index a810421f1fb3..3920f28710c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
@@ -524,7 +524,7 @@
    - Michael Lang
  
    June 25 1997: (v1.8b)
-   1) Some cosmetical changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types.
+   1) Some cosmetic changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types.
       Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For
       MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported.
       In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one
@@ -914,7 +914,7 @@
       in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were
       based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands
       did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons.
-   5) Dynamical reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be
+   5) Dynamic reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be
       completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now.
    6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and
       completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the
@@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@
    concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any
    warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain 
    machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude,
-   that dataloss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this
+   that data loss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this
    part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination 
    with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup
    copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt
index 4dbe41370a6d..5741ea8aa88a 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Cable pull and temporary device Loss:
   being removed, a switch rebooting, or a device reboot), the driver could
   hide the disappearance of the device from the midlayer. I/O's issued to
   the LLDD would simply be queued for a short duration, allowing the device
-  to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertant side effects
+  to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertent side effects
   to the system. If the driver did not hide these conditions, i/o would be
   errored by the driver, the mid-layer would exhaust its retries, and the
   device would be taken offline. Manual intervention would be required to
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
index d403e46d8463..75143f0c23b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Overview:
     discussion will concentrate on NPIV.
 
   Note: World Wide Name assignment (and uniqueness guarantees) are left
-    up to an administrative entity controling the vport. For example,
+    up to an administrative entity controlling the vport. For example,
     if vports are to be associated with virtual machines, a XEN mgmt
     utility would be responsible for creating wwpn/wwnn's for the vport,
     using it's own naming authority and OUI. (Note: it already does this
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Device Trees and Vport Objects:
   Here's what to expect in the device tree :
    The typical Physical Port's Scsi_Host:
      /sys/devices/.../host17/
-   and it has the typical decendent tree:
+   and it has the typical descendant tree:
      /sys/devices/.../host17/rport-17:0-0/target17:0:0/17:0:0:0:
    and then the vport is created on the Physical Port:
      /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Vport States:
       independent of the adapter's link state.
     - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc.
       This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization.
-  Futher information can be found in the interfaces section below for
+  Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for
   Vport Creation.
 
   Once a vport has been instantiated with the kernel/LLDD, a vport state
diff --git a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt
index 9aef710e9a4b..114b595cfa97 100644
--- a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ means no changes to adjanced clock
 Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method,
 if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust
 all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id.
-Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependend. For the sh7722, the following
+Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependent. For the sh7722, the following
 values are defined:
 
         NO_CHANGE       = 0,
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
index 72aff61e7315..b117e42a6166 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
@@ -1024,6 +1024,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
           intel-mac-v3  Intel Mac Type 3
           intel-mac-v4  Intel Mac Type 4
           intel-mac-v5  Intel Mac Type 5
+          intel-mac-auto Intel Mac (detect type according to subsystem id)
           macmini       Intel Mac Mini (equivalent with type 3)
           macbook       Intel Mac Book (eq. type 5)
           macbook-pro-v1 Intel Mac Book Pro 1st generation (eq. type 3)
@@ -1143,8 +1144,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
 
-    Power management is _not_ supported.
-
   Module snd-ice1712
   ------------------
 
@@ -1627,8 +1626,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
 
-    Power management is _not_ supported.
-
   Module snd-pcsp
   -----------------
 
@@ -2080,13 +2077,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
   Module snd-virtuoso
   -------------------
 
-    Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV200 chip, i.e.,
-    Xonar D2 and Xonar D2X.
+    Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips,
+    i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2 and D2X.
 
     This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
 
-    Power management is _not_ supported.
-
   Module snd-vx222
   ----------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
index 2ad5e6306c44..a4c53d8961e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
@@ -236,15 +236,15 @@ The parameter can be given:
        alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio
        options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09
 
-CAUTION when initializaing the device
+CAUTION when initializing the device
 -------------------------------------
 
  * Correct initialization on the device requires that device_setup is given to
    the module BEFORE the device is turned on. So, if you use the "manual probing"
    method described above, take care to power-on the device AFTER this initialization.
 
- * Failing to respect this will lead in a misconfiguration of the device. In this case
-   turn off the device, unproble the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with 
+ * Failing to respect this will lead to a misconfiguration of the device. In this case
+   turn off the device, unprobe the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with
    correct device_setup parameter and then (and only then) turn on the device again.
 
  * If you've correctly initialized the device in a valid mode and then want to switch
@@ -388,9 +388,9 @@ There are 2 main potential issues when using Jackd with the device:
 
 Jack supports big endian devices only in recent versions (thanks to
 Andreas Steinmetz for his first big-endian patch). I can't remember 
-extacly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that 
+exactly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that
 with jackd version 0.103.0 it's almost ok (just a small bug is affecting 
-16bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read  carefully the above 
+16bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above
 paragraphs, you're now using kernel >= 2.6.23 and your 16bits devices 
 are now Little Endians ;-) ).
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
index c4d2e3507af9..9d644f7e241e 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
      <sect1><title>Device Components</title>
 !Esound/core/device.c
      </sect1>
-     <sect1><title>KMOD and Device File Entries</title>
+     <sect1><title>Module requests and Device File Entries</title>
 !Esound/core/sound.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Memory Management Helpers</title>
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
index 8e1b02526698..34e87ec1379c 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE kconfig.  It's called when the codec needs
 to power up or may power down.  The controller should check the all
 belonging codecs on the bus whether they are actually powered off
 (check codec->power_on), and optionally the driver may power down the
-contoller side, too.
+controller side, too.
 
 The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new().  You need to pass
 the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
index c784a18b94dc..b2ed6983f40d 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Audio DAPM widgets fall into a number of types:-
 (Widgets are defined in include/sound/soc-dapm.h)
 
 Widgets are usually added in the codec driver and the machine driver. There are
-convience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a
+convenience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a
 list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets.
 
 Most widgets have a name, register, shift and invert. Some widgets have extra
diff --git a/Documentation/sparse.txt b/Documentation/sparse.txt
index 1a3bdc27d95e..42f43fa59f24 100644
--- a/Documentation/sparse.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sparse.txt
@@ -73,10 +73,10 @@ recompiled, or use "make C=2" to run sparse on the files whether they need to
 be recompiled or not.  The latter is a fast way to check the whole tree if you
 have already built it.
 
-The optional make variable CHECKFLAGS can be used to pass arguments to sparse.
-The build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically.  To perform
-endianness checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__:
+The optional make variable CF can be used to pass arguments to sparse.  The
+build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically.  To perform endianness
+checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__:
 
-        make C=2 CHECKFLAGS="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__"
+        make C=2 CF="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__"
 
 These checks are disabled by default as they generate a host of warnings.
diff --git a/Documentation/specialix.txt b/Documentation/specialix.txt
index 4a4b428ce8f6..6eb6f3a3331c 100644
--- a/Documentation/specialix.txt
+++ b/Documentation/specialix.txt
@@ -270,8 +270,8 @@ The pinout of the connectors on the IO8+ is:
 Hardware handshaking issues.
 ============================
 
-The driver can be compiled in two different ways. The default
-("Specialix DTR/RTS pin is RTS" is off) the pin behaves as DTR when
+The driver can be told to operate in two different ways. The default
+behaviour is specialix.sx_rtscts = 0 where the pin behaves as DTR when
 hardware handshaking is off. It behaves as the RTS hardware
 handshaking signal when hardware handshaking is selected.
 
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ cable will either be compatible with hardware handshaking or with
 software handshaking. So switching on the fly is not really an
 option.
 
-I actually prefer to use the "Specialix DTR/RTS pin is RTS" option.
+I actually prefer to use the "specialix.sx_rtscts=1" option.
 This makes the DTR/RTS pin always an RTS pin, and ioctls to
 change DTR are always ignored. I have a cable that is configured
 for this. 
@@ -379,7 +379,5 @@ it doesn't fit in your computer, bring back the card.
             You have to WRITE to the address register to even 
             read-probe a CD186x register. Disable autodetection?
          -- Specialix: any suggestions?
-       - Arbitrary baud rates are not implemented yet. 
-            If you need this, bug me about it. 
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/Makefile b/Documentation/spi/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a5b03c88beae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/spi/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := spidev_test spidev_fdx
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_test.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
+HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_fdx.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
index f3853cc37bde..bbe8dee681a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
+++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers
 -----------------------------------
 Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a
 "platform device".  The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table
-found in include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h:
+found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h:
 
 struct pxa2xx_spi_master {
         enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type;
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See
 
 Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration
 information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in
-"include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h".  The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
+"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h".  The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
 will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave
 device.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
index 6d5f18143c50..8bae2f018d34 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
+++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ board should normally be set up and registered.
 
 So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like:
 
-        #include <asm/arch/spi.h>       /* for mysoc_spi_data */
+        #include <mach/spi.h>   /* for mysoc_spi_data */
 
         /* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can
          * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init".
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like:
 
 And SOC-specific utility code might look something like:
 
-        #include <asm/arch/spi.h>
+        #include <mach/spi.h>
 
         static struct platform_device spi2 = { ... };
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index 8a4863c4edd4..d79eeda7a699 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ of kilobytes free.  The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min
 value for each lowmem zone in the system.  Each lowmem zone gets 
 a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size.
 
-Some minimal ammount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC
+Some minimal amount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC
 allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will
 become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt b/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
index 80ef562160bb..6049a2a84dda 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
@@ -3,9 +3,8 @@ Rules on how to access information in the Linux kernel sysfs
 The kernel-exported sysfs exports internal kernel implementation details
 and depends on internal kernel structures and layout. It is agreed upon
 by the kernel developers that the Linux kernel does not provide a stable
-internal API. As sysfs is a direct export of kernel internal
-structures, the sysfs interface cannot provide a stable interface either;
-it may always change along with internal kernel changes.
+internal API. Therefore, there are aspects of the sysfs interface that
+may not be stable across kernel releases.
 
 To minimize the risk of breaking users of sysfs, which are in most cases
 low-level userspace applications, with a new kernel release, the users
diff --git a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
index 621024fd3a18..44d124005bad 100644
--- a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
+++ b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
@@ -305,21 +305,14 @@ driver, like this:
 
 which will result in the needed drivers getting loaded automatically.
 
-   g.  if you are planning on using kerneld to automatically load the 
-module for you, then you need to edit /etc/conf.modules and add the 
+   g.  if you are planning on having the kernel automatically request
+the module for you, then you need to edit /etc/conf.modules and add the
 following lines:
 
         options ixj dspio=0x340 xio=0x330 ixjdebug=0
 
 If you do this, then when you execute an application that uses the
-module kerneld will load the module for you.  Note that to do this,
-you need to have your kernel set to support kerneld.  You can check
-for this by looking at /usr/src/linux/.config and you should see this:
-
-        # Loadable module support
-        #
-        <snip>
-        CONFIG_KMOD=y
+module the kernel will request that it is loaded.
 
   h.  if you want non-root users to be able to read and write to the 
 ixj devices (this is a good idea!) you should do the following:
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
index a73ecf5b4bdb..21332233cef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ increase of flexibility and the avoidance of duplicated code across
 architectures justifies the slight increase of the binary size.
 
 The conversion of an architecture has no functional impact, but allows to
-utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalites without any change
+utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalities without any change
 to the clock event device and timer interrupt code. After the conversion the
 enabling of high resolution timers and dynamic ticks is simply provided by
 adding the kernel/time/Kconfig file to the architecture specific Kconfig and
diff --git a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
index b0472ac5226a..f866c72291bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
+++ b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
@@ -218,9 +218,35 @@ If use of such macros is not convenient, another option is to use memcpy(),
 where the source or destination (or both) are of type u8* or unsigned char*.
 Due to the byte-wise nature of this operation, unaligned accesses are avoided.
 
+
+Alignment vs. Networking
+========================
+
+On architectures that require aligned loads, networking requires that the IP
+header is aligned on a four-byte boundary to optimise the IP stack. For
+regular ethernet hardware, the constant NET_IP_ALIGN is used. On most
+architectures this constant has the value 2 because the normal ethernet
+header is 14 bytes long, so in order to get proper alignment one needs to
+DMA to an address which can be expressed as 4*n + 2. One notable exception
+here is powerpc which defines NET_IP_ALIGN to 0 because DMA to unaligned
+addresses can be very expensive and dwarf the cost of unaligned loads.
+
+For some ethernet hardware that cannot DMA to unaligned addresses like
+4*n+2 or non-ethernet hardware, this can be a problem, and it is then
+required to copy the incoming frame into an aligned buffer. Because this is
+unnecessary on architectures that can do unaligned accesses, the code can be
+made dependent on CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS like so:
+
+#ifdef CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
+        skb = original skb
+#else
+        skb = copy skb
+#endif
+
 --
-Author: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>
+Authors: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>,
+         Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
 With help from: Alan Cox, Avuton Olrich, Heikki Orsila, Jan Engelhardt,
-Johannes Berg, Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock,
-Uli Kunitz, Vadim Lobanov
+Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock, Uli Kunitz,
+Vadim Lobanov
 
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt b/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ee4d8f69116..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-                Auerswald USB kernel driver
-                ===========================
-
-What is it? What can I do with it?
-==================================
-The auerswald USB kernel driver connects your linux 2.4.x
-system to the auerswald usb-enabled devices.
-
-There are two types of auerswald usb devices:
-a) small PBX systems (ISDN)
-b) COMfort system telephones (ISDN)
-
-The driver installation creates the devices
-/dev/usb/auer0..15. These devices carry a vendor-
-specific protocol. You may run all auerswald java
-software on it. The java software needs a native
-library "libAuerUsbJNINative.so" installed on
-your system. This library is available from
-auerswald and shipped as part of the java software.
-
-You may create the devices with:
-        mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer0 c 180 112
-        ...
-        mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer15 c 180 127
-
-Future plans
-============
-- Connection to ISDN4LINUX (the hisax interface)
-
-The maintainer of this driver is wolfgang@iksw-muees.de
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
index 2af400609498..381b22ee7834 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down
 of USB devices, fully controlled by user space.
 
 As of now, when a USB device is connected it is configured and
-it's interfaces inmediately made available to the users. With this
+its interfaces are immediately made available to the users.  With this
 modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will
 then it be possible to use it.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
index b2fc4d4a9917..9d31140e3f5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -436,7 +436,12 @@ post_reset; the USB core guarantees that this is true of internal
 suspend/resume events as well.
 
 If a driver wants to block all suspend/resume calls during some
-critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex.
+critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. Note that
+calls to resume may be triggered indirectly. Block IO due to memory
+allocations can make the vm subsystem resume a device. Thus while
+holding this lock you must not allocate memory with GFP_KERNEL or
+GFP_NOFS.
+
 Alternatively, if the critical section might call some of the
 usb_autopm_* routines, the driver can avoid deadlock by doing:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
index 86d1c8e7b18f..eedc399e8deb 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
@@ -2,3 +2,4 @@
   1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q                        (au0828)        [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008]
   2 -> Hauppauge HVR850                         (au0828)        [2040:7240]
   3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB                     (au0828)        [0fe9:d620]
+  4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8               (au0828)        [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
index 10591467ef16..89c7f32abf9f 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
   0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber             (em2800)        [eb1a:2800]
-  1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber        (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
+  1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber        (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
   2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB                 (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036]
   3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2                      (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208]
   4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2                    (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201]
   5 -> MSI VOX USB 2.0                          (em2820/em2840)
   6 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 USB                 (em2800)
-  7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II                   (em2800)
+  7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II                   (em2800)        [0413:6023]
   8 -> Kworld USB2800                           (em2800)
   9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/DVC 100           (em2820/em2840) [2304:0207,2304:021a]
  10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900                  (em2880)        [2040:6500]
@@ -14,7 +14,46 @@
  13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS                      (em2880)        [0ccd:0047]
  14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0         (em2820/em2840)
  15 -> V-Gear PocketTV                          (em2800)
- 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950                  (em2880)        [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f]
+ 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950                  (em2883)        [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f]
  17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick               (em2880)        [2304:0227]
  18 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (R2)             (em2880)        [2040:6502]
  19 -> PointNix Intra-Oral Camera               (em2860)
+ 20 -> AMD ATI TV Wonder HD 600                 (em2880)        [0438:b002]
+ 21 -> eMPIA Technology, Inc. GrabBeeX+ Video Encoder (em2800)        [eb1a:2801]
+ 22 -> Unknown EM2750/EM2751 webcam grabber     (em2750)        [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2751]
+ 23 -> Huaqi DLCW-130                           (em2750)
+ 24 -> D-Link DUB-T210 TV Tuner                 (em2820/em2840) [2001:f112]
+ 25 -> Gadmei UTV310                            (em2820/em2840)
+ 26 -> Hercules Smart TV USB 2.0                (em2820/em2840)
+ 27 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (Philips FM1216ME)   (em2820/em2840)
+ 28 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II Deluxe            (em2820/em2840)
+ 29 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 100                  (em2820/em2840)
+ 30 -> Videology 20K14XUSB USB2.0               (em2820/em2840)
+ 31 -> Usbgear VD204v9                          (em2821)
+ 32 -> Supercomp USB 2.0 TV                     (em2821)
+ 33 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR/Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0  (em2821)
+ 34 -> Terratec Cinergy A Hybrid XS             (em2860)        [0ccd:004f]
+ 35 -> Typhoon DVD Maker                        (em2860)
+ 36 -> NetGMBH Cam                              (em2860)
+ 37 -> Gadmei UTV330                            (em2860)
+ 38 -> Yakumo MovieMixer                        (em2861)
+ 39 -> KWorld PVRTV 300U                        (em2861)        [eb1a:e300]
+ 40 -> Plextor ConvertX PX-TV100U               (em2861)        [093b:a005]
+ 41 -> Kworld 350 U DVB-T                       (em2870)        [eb1a:e350]
+ 42 -> Kworld 355 U DVB-T                       (em2870)        [eb1a:e355,eb1a:e357]
+ 43 -> Terratec Cinergy T XS                    (em2870)        [0ccd:0043]
+ 44 -> Terratec Cinergy T XS (MT2060)           (em2870)
+ 45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T                      (em2870)
+ 46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3                     (em2870)        [185b:2870]
+ 47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U                        (em2880)        [eb1a:e305]
+ 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U                        (em2880)
+ 49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D                          (em2880)        [eb1a:e310]
+ 50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II                       (em2880)        [eb1a:e320]
+ 51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam                 (em2880)        [0ccd:004c]
+ 52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid                           (em2881)
+ 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro                      (em2881)
+ 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR                    (em2882)        [eb1a:e323]
+ 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882)              (em2882)        [0ccd:005e]
+ 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2)                  (em2882)        [2304:0226]
+ 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330              (em2883)        [eb1a:a316]
+ 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo           (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ed0e98d057d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := v4lgrab
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
index 0c4880af57a3..78a863ab8a5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-List of the webcams know by gspca.
+List of the webcams known by gspca.
 
 The modules are:
         gspca_main      main driver
@@ -226,6 +226,7 @@ sonixj		0c45:6130	Sonix Pccam
 sonixj          0c45:6138       Sn9c120 Mo4000
 sonixj          0c45:613b       Surfer SN-206
 sonixj          0c45:613c       Sonix Pccam168
+sonixj          0c45:6143       Sonix Pccam168
 sunplus         0d64:0303       Sunplus FashionCam DXG
 etoms           102c:6151       Qcam Sangha CIF
 etoms           102c:6251       Qcam xxxxxx VGA
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
index b26f5195af51..73de4050d637 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Loading can be done as shown below:
 
         [root@localhost home]# modprobe sn9c102
 
-Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, althought it
+Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, although it
 does not just support the SN9C102.
 
 At this point all the devices supported by the driver and connected to the USB
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
index e0bba8393c77..05138e8aea07 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
@@ -193,9 +193,6 @@ Description:     Automatic 'ovcamchip' module loading: 0 disabled, 1 enabled.
                  loads that module automatically. This action is performed as
                  once soon as the 'w9968cf' module is loaded into memory.
 Default:         1
-Note:            The kernel must be compiled with the CONFIG_KMOD option
-                 enabled for the 'ovcamchip' module to be loaded and for
-                 this parameter to be present.
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Name:           simcams
 Type:           int
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6f562f778b28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := slabinfo
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
index 3102b81bef88..ea8714fcc3ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ memory that is preset in system at this time.  System administrators may want
 to put this command in one of the local rc init files.  This will enable the
 kernel to request huge pages early in the boot process (when the possibility
 of getting physical contiguous pages is still very high). In either
-case, adminstrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually
+case, administrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually
 allocated by checking the sysctl or meminfo.
 
 /proc/sys/vm/nr_overcommit_hugepages indicates how large the pool of
@@ -95,6 +95,29 @@ this condition holds, however, no more surplus huge pages will be
 allowed on the system until one of the two sysctls are increased
 sufficiently, or the surplus huge pages go out of use and are freed.
 
+With support for multiple hugepage pools at run-time available, much of
+the hugepage userspace interface has been duplicated in sysfs. The above
+information applies to the default hugepage size (which will be
+controlled by the proc interfaces for backwards compatibility). The root
+hugepage control directory is
+
+        /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages
+
+For each hugepage size supported by the running kernel, a subdirectory
+will exist, of the form
+
+        hugepages-${size}kB
+
+Inside each of these directories, the same set of files will exist:
+
+        nr_hugepages
+        nr_overcommit_hugepages
+        free_hugepages
+        resv_hugepages
+        surplus_hugepages
+
+which function as described above for the default hugepage-sized case.
+
 If the user applications are going to request hugepages using mmap system
 call, then it is required that system administrator mount a file system of
 type hugetlbfs:
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
index bad16d3f6a47..6aaaeb38730c 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ most general to most specific:
         the policy at the time they were allocated.
 
     VMA Policy:  A "VMA" or "Virtual Memory Area" refers to a range of a task's
-    virtual adddress space.  A task may define a specific policy for a range
+    virtual address space.  A task may define a specific policy for a range
     of its virtual address space.   See the MEMORY POLICIES APIS section,
     below, for an overview of the mbind() system call used to set a VMA
     policy.
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ follows:
 
    Because of this extra reference counting, and because we must lookup
    shared policies in a tree structure under spinlock, shared policies are
-   more expensive to use in the page allocation path.  This is expecially
+   more expensive to use in the page allocation path.  This is especially
    true for shared policies on shared memory regions shared by tasks running
    on different NUMA nodes.  This extra overhead can be avoided by always
    falling back to task or system default policy for shared memory regions,
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page_migration b/Documentation/vm/page_migration
index 99f89aa10169..d5fdfd34bbaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/page_migration
+++ b/Documentation/vm/page_migration
@@ -18,10 +18,11 @@ migrate_pages function call takes two sets of nodes and moves pages of a
 process that are located on the from nodes to the destination nodes.
 Page migration functions are provided by the numactl package by Andi Kleen
 (a version later than 0.9.3 is required. Get it from
-ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/ak). numactl provided libnuma which
-provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page migration.
-cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the pages of
-a process are located. See also the numa_maps manpage in the numactl package.
+ftp://oss.sgi.com/www/projects/libnuma/download/). numactl provides libnuma
+which provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page
+migration.  cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the
+pages of a process are located. See also the numa_maps documentation in the
+proc(5) man page.
 
 Manual migration is useful if for example the scheduler has relocated
 a process to a processor on a distant node. A batch scheduler or an
diff --git a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
index 10c2e411cca8..991c26a6ef64 100644
--- a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
+++ b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
@@ -114,6 +114,6 @@ CREDITS
 
 Original impetus and research by Randy Dunlap
 Written by Jonathan Corbet
-Improvements via coments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper
+Improvements via comments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper
         Juhl, Heikki Orsila, H. Peter Anvin, Philipp Hahn, and Stefan
         Richter.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..40e5f46e4740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := watchdog-simple watchdog-test
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)